Camp Ripley Training Center
2013 Range Operations
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
“THE WARRIOR’S CHOICE”
COL Scott St. Sauver, Post Commander
Camp Ripley Training Center
15000 Highway 115
Little Falls, MN 56345-4173
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
State of Minnesota
Department of Military Affairs
CAMP RIPLEY TRAINING CENTER
Camp Ripley Little Falls, MN 56345
Appendix 1 Range Operations (Range Regulation) TO ANNEX A Operations and
Training TO CRTC Regulation. This Appendix is a summary of policies and procedures
set forth by AR 385-63, DA Pamphlet 385-63, NGR 385-63, AR 385-64, DA Pamphlet
385-64, AR 210-10, TC 25-8, and any other Regulations pertaining to the use and
operation of the Field Training Area, Live-Fire ranges, Non-Live Fire ranges, and
ammunition usage in the Installation. All persons entering the Field Training Area are
subject to the regulations set forth in this document.
Violations of this Regulation by persons subject to the Uniform Code of Military
Justice will be prosecuted there under. Any other persons who violate this Regulation
may be prosecuted by administrative action by the Installation Commander or other
appropriate military or civilian authority.
Scott A. St. Sauver
Colonel, FA, MNARNG
Post Commander
Dated:
19 July 2013
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
2013 Range Operations Summary of Changes
o All changes to the below chapters is per the DA PAM 385-63 to reflect the same chapters
o Chapter 3 Ammunition of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation moved to Chapter 2, 2.7
AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVE ITEMS ON RANGES
o Chapter 3 Ammunition of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 3 Danger
Zones
o Chapter 4 Firing of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 4 Small Arms
o Chapter 5 Targets of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 5 Hand Grenades
and Grenade Launchers
o Chapter 6 Small Arms and Machine Guns of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to
Chapter 6 Antitank Rockets
o Chapter 7 Grenades and Grenade Launchers of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to
Chapter 7 Antitank Guided Missiles
o Chapter 8 Antitank Rockets of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 8
Tank/Fighting Vehicle Gunnery
o Chapter 11 Tanks and Bradley Fighting Vehicle (BFV) Gunnery of the 2012 Draft Range Control
Regulation changed to Chapter 11 Aviation Range Safety – Aerial Gunnery
o Chapter 12 Aerial Gunnery of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 12 Air
Defense Artillery Weapon System
o Chapter 13 Air Defense Weapons of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 13
Chemical Agents and Smoke
o Chapter 14 Guided Missiles of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 14 NonLethal Weapons
o Chapter 15 Chemical Agents, Smoke and Aircraft Spray of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation
changed to Chapter 15 Mines, Firing Devices, Trip Flares, Simulators, and Explosive Charges
o Chapter 16 Mines, Firing Devices, Trip Flares, Simulators, and Explosive Charges of the 2012 Draft
Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 16 Laser Range Safety
o Chapter 17 Lasers of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 12 Live-Fire
Exercises
o Chapter 18 Live-Fire Exercises of the 2012 Draft Range Control Regulation changed to Chapter 18
Environmental Management
o Added: NOTE: The use of digital media for FMs/TMs are AUTHORIZED as long as you have access to
keep your device charged and you are able to pull up the material/media anytime. (1.1.4)
o Change: For commanders of field artillery, mortar, and MLRS battalions or indirect fire will establish
and maintain safety training and certification program to train and qualify personnel in safety procedures
for their specific areas of responsibility. Personnel who have not completed annual certification training
will NOT be appointed as an OIC or RSO. (1.3.7, b))
o Change: Officers who have not completed their branch qualification course will not be able to OIC or
RSO FA, mortar, MLRS or indirect fire ranges. (1.3.7, c))
i
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
o Change: All Military Units and Civilian Lessees WILL order Portable Toilets from the Supply and
Services Warehouse at (320) 632-3128 for all activities scheduled in the field training area, except for
those ranges that have a classroom with latrine facilities in them. Any outside structured latrine will not be
utilized for Environmental reasons and pending deconstruction. (1.7.8)
o Added: NOTE: All activities for use as an assembly area or bivouac site in the Field Training Area are
considered un-authorized without an approved usage request (RFMSS Reservation) from Post
Operations and/or Range Control. (1.7.9)
o Added: NOTE: All Non-Tactical Vehicles MUST obtain a Range Control Vehicle Pass prior to entering
the Field Training Area and unmarked GSA’s are required to stop at RC also and obtain a vehicle pass.
Gov’t plates are not considered a marked vehicle. These vehicles MUST clear the Field Training Area
prior to the hours of darkness (prior to the need to turn on headlights), unless they are supporting range
operations or bivouac site, or in possession of a signed and approved Camping Request. (1.8.3)
o Change: NOTE: When passing troops or anyone on the side of the road, SLOW DOWN to 10 MPH.
(1.9.2)
o Added: Convoy/Road Marches information for downrange operations (1.14)
o Added: NOTE: For all established ranges a copy of the SDZ will be in the range packet you sign for at
Range Control and for unestablished ranges you will need to obtain an approved copy of the SDZ that
has been verified prior to opening. (3.1.2)
o NOTE: The batwing will be considered when designing or conducting training on ranges that involve
fire and movement, fire and maneuver, flanking fire, and/or when ricochet hazards outside the range
boundary may endanger nonparticipating personnel. Decision on the use of batwing will be based on
level of risk and approval of appropriate command risk acceptance authority. An Exception to Policy
memo will be submitted to Range Control to be verified and sent through channels for approval by the
Camp Ripley Post Commander. (per DA Pam 385-63, para 4-1c) (4.1.2, e))
o Procedural and administrative changes to Chapter 9 Mortars and Chapter 10 Artillery
o NOTE: Red smoke and Red Star Clusters are not necessarily used for emergency situations and can
be used for training. (13.1.1)
o Added: NOTE: The use of NLW/Less-Lethal Weapons are required to use the range control
BLANKS/SIMUNITIONS/LESS-LETHAL RANGES OPENING/CLOSING CHECKLIST. (14.2.1)
o Added: Supply and Services (3128) issue the PVC piping for waste water disposal drain field. (18.4.2)
o Change: Unestablished Water points used by units not hauling their potable water off site must also
follow the same approval procedures. However, environmental standards for locating these water points
will limit water points of this nature. The standards include a 100 meter setback from lakes, streams,
wetlands, and historic sites. Furthermore, wastewater discharge must be mixed with purified water to it’s
original concentration and shall be applied to land surface using the plastic drain field pipe. (18.4.3)
o Change: Crow Wing River site (UM 939283) is a permanent, self-sufficient electrical pump operated
potable water point. This site is used to draw water only. (18.4.5)
o Change: It is illegal to transport unpurified water (filtered 40 microns or greater) from infested waters,
Mississippi and Crow Wing Rivers, except by DNR permit. (18.4.7)
o Change: Ensuring that equipment is clean is critical to limiting the spread of invasive species. Any
equipment used to treat Mississippi or Crow Wing River water must be treated by one of the following
means prior to use in another water body: (18.4.7)
o Change: d) Fire danger status will be posted on a sign immediately adjacent to E gate outside the
Range Control Office. It will also be posted on the Range Bulletin. (18.5.3, d)
ii
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
o Added: FIRE DANGER CODE description table for Green, Yellow, and Red. (18.5.3)
o Change: d) A continuous berm, surrounding the storage site, will be constructed using on-site soils.
The dimensions of the bermed area should not be less than the total capacity of the fuel storage bladder
located within the area. The bermed area must be lined with an impervious material to act as a
secondary containment, in case of any failure or seepage from the storage container. This material is
issued through the Logistics Division, Camp Ripley, (320) 616-3128/3130. (18.8.2, d))
o Change: e) The area designated for conveying the fuel (i.e., hoses, piping, etc.) must be underlain with
an impermeable liner. (18.8.2, e))
o Moved SUSPENSE Dates from the beginning to end of Range Regulation labeled TAB L, Suspense
Dates.
o Moved Observation Point information to Chapter 1, 1.16.
o Added to Table 1-1 CRTC OIC/RSO requirements for Snipers, and Reflexive fire training events.
(moved to TAB K Range Control Tables)
o Change: Updated MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS; Range Control Table Medical Requirements moved to
TAB L, Range Control Tables.
o Removed forms from within the chapters and put them in TAB J Range Control Forms
o Removed Authorized White Light Road Map from Chapter 1 and put it in TAB I Authorized White Light
Road Map
o Removed from Chapter 1, Access to the ranges and field training areas, the use of ATV’s in training
areas and use personally owned weapons. Referenced in Camp Ripley Regulation
o Removed from Chapter 9 Mortars and Chapter 10 Artillery observation point information.
o Removed from Chapter 9 Mortars and Chapter 10 Artillery Declinations. Moved Declinations to TAB K
Range Control Tables.
o Change: Updated Chapter 10 Artillery HINE & LINE MACS charge allowance and High Angle
Restriction
o Removed from Chapter 18, Environmental: Tick-borne diseases, Fuel wood cutting permits, spill
procedures, and chemical latrines. Referenced in Camp Ripley Regulation
o makes administrative changes (throughout)
iii
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Table of Contents
CHAPTER 1 GENERAL ............................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 PURPOSE ........................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2 RANGE SAFETY CERTIFICATION PROGRAM ................................................................................ 1
1.3 RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................................................... 1
1.4 RISK MANAGEMENT - SAFETY ........................................................................................................ 5
1.5 ACCIDENT/INCIDENT REPORTING ................................................................................................. 5
1.6 MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS .............................................................................................................. 5
1.7 REQUESTING RANGES AND TRAINING AREAS ............................................................................ 6
1.8 ACCESS TO THE RANGES AND FIELD TRAINING AREA .............................................................. 6
1.9 SPEED LIMIT ENFORCEMENT ......................................................................................................... 7
1.10 WHITE LIGHT USAGE POLICY ....................................................................................................... 7
1.11 PRIVATELY OWNED VEHICLES (POVS) ....................................................................................... 7
1.12 FISHING ........................................................................................................................................... 8
1.13 USE OF FIELD TRAINING AREAS .................................................................................................. 8
1.14 CONVOY/ROAD MARCHES ............................................................................................................ 8
1.15 COMMUNICATIONS ......................................................................................................................... 9
1.16 OBSERVATION POINTS (OPS) ..................................................................................................... 10
1.17 OE 254 ANTENNAS ....................................................................................................................... 10
1.18 SEVERE WEATHER ....................................................................................................................... 11
1.19 MAPS .............................................................................................................................................. 11
CHAPTER 2 RANGES ............................................................................................................................... 12
2.1 RESTRICTING ACCESS TO IMPACT AREAS ................................................................................ 12
2.2 WARNING SIGNS, BARRIERS, MARKERS, AND FLAGS ............................................................. 12
2.3 RANGE USE BY NON-MILITARY/CIVILIAN AGENCIES ................................................................ 12
2.4 COORDINATING USE OF SPECIAL AIRSPACE ............................................................................ 13
2.5 UAS OPERATIONS .......................................................................................................................... 14
2.6 COORDINATING USE OF NAVIGABLE WATERWAYS ................................................................. 14
2.7 AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVE ITEMS ON RANGES .................................................................. 15
2.8 MISFIRE PROCEDURES/REPORTING ........................................................................................... 16
2.9 UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE (UXO) REPORTING .......................................................................... 16
2.10 DISPOSITION OF AMMUNTION AND EXPLOSIVES INVOLVED IN MALFUNCTIONS AND
ACCIDENTS............................................................................................................................................ 17
2.11 AMMUNITION TURN-IN PROCEDURES ....................................................................................... 17
2.12 RANGE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS .......................................... 18
2.13 RANGE TARGETS ......................................................................................................................... 19
CHAPTER 3 DANGER ZONES .................................................................................................................. 20
3.1 GENERAL ......................................................................................................................................... 20
3.2 AUTHORIZATION FOR PERSONNEL WITHIN DANGER ZONES ................................................. 20
CHAPTER 4 SMALL ARMS & MACHINE GUNS ...................................................................................... 21
4.1 FIRING CONDITIONS ...................................................................................................................... 21
4.2 OVERHEAD FIRE ............................................................................................................................. 21
4.3 FLANKING FIRE ............................................................................................................................... 22
4.4 BLANK AMMUNITION ...................................................................................................................... 22
4.5 MACHINE GUNS .............................................................................................................................. 22
4.6 UNESTABLISHED RANGES ............................................................................................................ 23
4.7 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION .......................................................................................................... 23
4.8 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................. 23
CHAPTER 5 GRENADES AND GRENADE LAUNCHERS ....................................................................... 24
5.1 HAND GRENADES ........................................................................................................................... 24
5.2 HAND GRENADE RANGE (HGR) (LIVE GRENADE FAMILIARIZATION) ..................................... 24
5.3 GRENADE LAUNCERS AND GRENADE MACHINE GUNS ........................................................... 25
5.4 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................. 25
CHAPTER 6 ANTITANK ROCKETS .......................................................................................................... 26
6.1 FIRING CONDITIONS ...................................................................................................................... 26
6.2 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................. 26
CHAPTER 7 ANTITANK GUIDED MISSILES ........................................................................................... 27
7.1 TOW MISSILES ................................................................................................................................ 27
7.2 DRAGON........................................................................................................................................... 27
iv
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
7.3 JAVELIN ............................................................................................................................................ 28
7.4 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................. 28
CHAPTER 8 TANK/FIGHTING VEHICLE GUNNERY ............................................................................... 29
8.1 GENERAL ........................................................................................................................................ 29
8.2 TANK/BFV FIRING CONDITIONS .................................................................................................... 29
8.3 M250/257 SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHERS .................................................................................. 29
8.4 WEAPONS EFFECT SIGNATURE SIMULATOR (HOFFMAN DEVICE) ......................................... 30
8.5 HAZARDOUS IMPULSE EXPOSURE .............................................................................................. 30
8.6 FIRING VEHICLE STATUS DESIGNATIONS .................................................................................. 30
8.7 CLOSE SUPPORT OF GROUND PERSONNEL IN LIVE-FIRE EXERCISES ................................ 30
8.8 AUTOMATED TOWER RADIO FREQUENCIES.............................................................................. 30
8.9 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................. 30
CHAPTER 9 MORTARS............................................................................................................................. 31
9.1 FIRING CONDITIONS ..................................................................................................................... 31
9.2 MORTAR FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM (MFCS) GUNNERY .............................................................. 32
9.3 HIP-SHOOT FIRE MISSIONS .......................................................................................................... 32
9.4 SURFACE DANGER ZONES ........................................................................................................... 32
9.5 REFERENCES .................................................................................................................................. 32
CHAPTER 10 ARTILLERY......................................................................................................................... 33
10.1 FIRING CONDITIONS – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 33
10.2 FIRING ARTILLERY CANNON – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................... 33
10.3 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON SURFACE DANGER ZONE .......................................................... 34
10.4 NON-ESTABLISHED FIRING POINT PROGRAM ......................................................................... 34
10.5 DIRECT FIRE SAFETY ................................................................................................................... 35
10.6 PALADIN AND ALL TOWED HOWITZERS .................................................................................... 35
10.7 MULTIPLE LAUNCH ROCKET SYSTEM (MLRS) ......................................................................... 35
10.8 RESTRICTIONS ON FIRING WHITE PHOSPHORUS .................................................................. 36
10.9 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................ 36
CHAPTER 11 AVIATION RANGE SAFETY – AERIAL GUNNERY.......................................................... 37
11.1 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................................. 37
11.2 FIRING OPERATIONS – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ................................................................ 37
11.3 FIRING CONDITIONS – GENERAL PROCEDURES..................................................................... 37
11.4 GUNNERY OPERATIONS.............................................................................................................. 38
11.5 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................ 38
CHAPTER 12 AIR DEFENSE ARTILLERY WEAPON SYSTEMS............................................................ 39
12.1 GENERAL INFORMATION ............................................................................................................. 39
12.2 AIR DEFENSE RADIO CONTROLLED MINIATURE AERIAL TARGET (RCMAT) ....................... 39
12.3 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................ 39
CHAPTER 13 CHEMICAL AGENTS, SMOKE, AND AIRCRAFT SPRAY ............................................... 40
13.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 40
13.2 RIOT CONTROL AGENTS ............................................................................................................. 40
13.3 SMOKE ........................................................................................................................................... 41
13.4 SMOKE POTS................................................................................................................................. 41
13.5 AIRCRAFT SPRAY ......................................................................................................................... 41
13.6 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................ 41
CHAPTER 14 NON-LETHAL WEAPONS .................................................................................................. 42
14.1 DEFINITION .................................................................................................................................... 42
14.2 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 42
14.3 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................ 43
CHAPTER 15 MINES, FIRING DEVICES, TRIP FLARES, SIMULATORS, AND EXPLOSIVE
CHARGES .................................................................................................................................................. 44
15.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 44
15.2 DEMOLITIONS AND EXPLOSIVES ............................................................................................... 45
15.3 FIRING DEVICES ........................................................................................................................... 45
15.4 SHAPED CHARGES ....................................................................................................................... 46
15.5 BANGALORE TORPEDOES .......................................................................................................... 46
15.6 MINE-CLEARING LINE CHARGE (MICLIC) .................................................................................. 46
15.7 CRATERING CHARGES ................................................................................................................ 46
15.8 MINES ............................................................................................................................................. 46
15.9 TRIP FLARES (M48 AND M49) ...................................................................................................... 47
v
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
15.10 SIMULATORS ............................................................................................................................... 47
15.11 LIVE FIRE EXERCISE BREACH FACILITY ................................................................................. 48
15.12 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................. 48
CHAPTER 16 LASER RANGE SAFETY ................................................................................................... 49
16.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 49
16.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR LASER DEVICES ........................................................................................ 49
16.3 FIRING CONDITIONS .................................................................................................................... 49
16.4 FORCE ON FORCE EXERCISES .................................................................................................. 50
16.5 REFERENCES ................................................................................................................................ 50
CHAPTER 17 LIVE FIRE EXERCISES ...................................................................................................... 51
17.1 SAFETY DURING LIVE-FIRE EXERCISES ................................................................................... 51
17.2 INFORMATION FOR COMMANDERS ........................................................................................... 51
17.3 EXERCISE TRAINING .................................................................................................................... 51
17.4 FIRING PRECAUTIONS ................................................................................................................. 52
17.5 FIRE CONTROL ............................................................................................................................. 53
17.6 MANEUVER IN TEMPORARY IMPACT AREAS ........................................................................... 54
17.7 AIR SUPPORT ................................................................................................................................ 54
17.8 TRAINING UNIT’S RESPONSIBILITIES ........................................................................................ 54
17.9 RANGE CONTROL’S RESPONSIBILITIES ................................................................................... 55
17.10 CHANGES IN LFX/CALFEX SCENARIOS ................................................................................... 55
17.11 INFANTRY PLATOON BATTLE COURSE (IPBC) ....................................................................... 55
17.12 CONVOY LIVE FIRE EXERCISE (LFX) ....................................................................................... 55
17.13 REFERENCES .............................................................................................................................. 56
CHAPTER 18 ENVIRONMENTAL MANAGEMENT .................................................................................. 57
18.1 GENERAL ....................................................................................................................................... 57
18.2 LIMITED USE AREAS .................................................................................................................... 57
18.3 RESTRICTIONS ON FIRING WHITE PHOSPHORUS .................................................................. 57
18.4 FIELD WATER POINTS .................................................................................................................. 57
18.5 FIRE CONTROL PROCEDURES ................................................................................................... 58
18.6 HISTORICAL PRESERVATION ..................................................................................................... 58
18.7 NOISE MONITORING ..................................................................................................................... 58
18.8 FIELD FUEL STORAGE/BLADDERS ............................................................................................. 59
18.9 MOBILE POL DISTRIBUTION POINTS ......................................................................................... 59
18.10 MECHANICAL DIGGING .............................................................................................................. 59
18.11 VEGETATION ............................................................................................................................... 60
TAB A RANGE DESCRIPTIONS
TAB B RISK MANAGEMENT
TAB C ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT REPORTING
TAB D RANGE CONTROL CONTACT INFORMATION / EMERGENCY INFO
TAB E ZULU MAST MAP
TAB F IMPROVED LANDING AREAS MAP
TAB G TRAINING AREA MAPS
TAB H DROP ZONES
TAB I AUTHORIZED WHITE LIGHT ROAD MAP
TAB J RANGE CONTROL FORMS
TAB K RANGE CONTROL TABLES
TAB L SUSPENSE DATES
TAB M RANGE CONTROL EQUIPMENT SUPPORT
vi
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 1 General
1.1 PURPOSE: The purpose of this regulation is to provide guidance for maximum realistic combat
readiness training. To provide guidance for the proper use of available terrain and facilities down range
on Camp Ripley, consistent with appropriate safety measures to prevent injury to personnel or damage to
property.
1.1.1 The Camp Ripley Range Operations Appendix is published to establish safe, uniform policies and
procedures applicable to the proper use of range facilities and training areas on this installation.
1.1.2 The provisions of this appendix apply to all personnel, military or civilian, utilizing or occupying
any portion of the field training areas, to include airspace, within the installation boundaries. Personnel
utilizing any range training facility must comply with this publication, and become familiar with AR 385-63
Range Safety, DA Pamphlet 385-63 Range Safety, AR 385-64 U.S. Army Explosives Safety Program,
and DA Pamphlet 385-64 Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards.
1.1.3 NOTE: Any unit, person, organization, agency, or club that willfully violates a policy or
procedure included in this regulation or any of the referenced publications below will be
suspended from installation training and/or punished under the Uniform Code of Military Justice
(UCMJ) or Minnesota Statutes.
1.1.4 NOTE: The use of digital media for FMs/TMs are AUTHORIZED as long as you have access
to keep your device charged and you are able to pull up the material/media anytime.
1.2 RANGE SAFETY CERTIFICATION PROGRAM: Range safety certification programs will be used to
train, qualify personnel in the duties of Officer-in- Charge (OIC), and Range Safety Officer (RSO) for
firing exercises and maneuver operations. Sample weapon tests can be obtained from Range Control, or
from the Range Control MN Sharepoint Portal page, http://ngmnsp2010/CRTC/OPS/Range/default.aspx,
or non-MNARNG units can contact Range Control.
1.2.1 Range Safety Certification Programs will be integrated into organizational training.
1.2.2 Once satisfied through training and testing that individuals are qualified to perform the duties of
OIC and RSO of the firing unit, battalion/squadron commanders (O-5 or O-4P) utilizing the Weapon
Safety Certification Memorandum (see TAB J) will forward their names to range control for appropriate
action. This certification stated on the Weapon Safety Certification is valid for 1 (one) year.
1.2.3 NOTE: Units not having a Battalion/Squadron Commander must obtain certification from
an O-5/O-4 (P) in an O-5 command position or higher, within their chain of command.
1.2.4 The Range Control Officer (RCO) will provide personnel designated as OICs and RSOs a range
safety briefing on the use of the training complex as part of their certification. The briefing is valid for a
period of 90 (ninety) days.
1.2.5 The RCO and his range control staff will monitor the effectiveness of the range safety certification
programs for OICs and RSOs.
1.2.6 The RCO has authority to revoke certification of any OIC or RSO for violating the requirements of
AR 385-63, DAM 385-63, or this regulation.
1.2.7 GUIDELINES FOR BATTALION SAFETY CERTIFICATION PROGRAMS: Battalion Safety
Certification Programs will be used to train and certify personnel in the duties of OIC and RSO for firing
exercises and/or maneuver operations. Sample weapon tests can be obtained from Range Control, or
from the Range Control MN SharePoint Portal page, http://ngmnsp2010/CRTC/OPS/Range/default.aspx,
or non-MNARNG units can contact Range Control.
a) Battalion Safety Certification Programs will be integrated into unit gunnery training programs,
combining the unique individual needs of the units concerned.
b) Once all requirements of the Battalion Safety Program are met, the BN/SQDN CDR (O-5 or O-4P)
will certify the OICs and RSOs utilizing the Weapon Safety Certification Memorandum (see TAB J). This
certification is valid for 1 (one) year. A copy must be sent to Range Control.
c) Prior to range operations, personnel designated as OIC and RSO will receive a Range Safety
Briefing from Range Control. This briefing is valid for a period of ninety days.
1-3 RESPONSIBILITIES: Commanders of units and activities will comply with guidelines established in
AR 385-63, DA Pam 385-63, and this publication, regarding the functions of appropriate and safe range
operation. The following is a list of personnel, and their responsibilities, for safe operation of the ranges
and field training areas.
1
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
1.3.1 The Installation/Post Commander
Command and operate the training center effectively, safely, and IAW applicable laws and regulations.
a) Organize training center support activities and establish management procedures IAW current
regulations.
b) Develop and forward through command channels appropriate requests for deviation from the
standardized organization and functional alignments prescribed by this SOP.
c) Ensure training center staff, civilian and military receive appropriate training. Ensure adequate
resources are provided to guarantee continual effective operation of the training center.
1.3.2 Installation Operations Officer
a) Serves as the unit’s initial POC for all information relating to Camp Ripley.
b) Serves as the POC for all scheduling activities.
c) Represents the Post Commander in all matters pertaining to the control and access of ranges and
training areas.
d) Is the Post Incident Control Officer.
1.3.3 Installation Safety Manager
a) Provide oversight responsibility for all range safety matters
b) Investigate or ensure range accidents are investigated by the appropriate command level.
c) Review all nonstandard range and training activities, to include the user-provided RM
documentation for those activities with high or extremely high residual risk.
d) Review and make recommendations regarding the conduct of overhead fire.
e) Investigate and report AE accidents, IAW DoD 6055/9-STD and AR 385-10.
f) Coordinate AE safety program requirements with tentat unit Commanders.
1.3.4 Installation Range Control Officer
a) Serves as the central point for control and coordination of all activities conducted within the
installation training complex to ensure safety and unified operations.
b) Withdraws or suspends installation training complex privileges from any person, organization,
agency, or club that willfully violates regulations and/or procedures listed in DA Pamphlet 385-63 or this
regulation; or from any person whose ability or conduct is incompatible with the safe use of government
range structures and facilities.
c) Responsible for providing safe training environments by ensuring all aerial and surface danger
zones are identified, and all control measures are employed.
d) Publishes a Range Bulletin for Camp Ripley at least 24 hours prior to any scheduled firing. The
Range Bulletin is available at Range Control, Bldg. 24-199, and at the Camp Ripley Operations Office,
Bldg. 11-1. The Range Bulletins are also available for MNARNG units ONLY in the CRTC Range Control
SharePoint site at: http://ngmnsp2010/CRTC/OPS/Range/default.aspx. It will include the following items:
1) Where firing is going to be conducted.
2) The scheduled time firing begins and ends each day.
3) The boundaries of Weapon Surface Danger Zones (SDZ), Aerial Weapon and Air Drop Danger
Zones (ADZ), and UAS/SUAS Restricted Operations Zones (ROZ).
4) Displays and updates the following information:
5) Range Maps
6) Overlays
7) Firing Data
8) Opening and closing of field training areas, and bivouac sites.
9) SDZ, ADZ, and ROZ information for the current day, plus 72 hours following.
10) Monitors the following SINCGARS radio frequencies reserved exclusively for CRTC Range
Control:
11) Primary Frequency is 36.100 (Single Channel Plain Text)
12) Alternate Frequency is 36.900 (Single Channel Plain Text)
13) The RCO will monitor the effectiveness of safety programs for OICs and RSOs.
14) The RCO has authority to revoke certification of any OIC or RSO for violating the requirements
of AR 385-63, DA Pam 385-63, or this regulation.
1.3.5 Liaison Officer (during AT Periods only)
a) Using units will appoint a Liaison Officer (normally the S-3) to coordinate with Range Control and
other training units.
b) Serves as unit POC for all activities in the field training area.
c) The Liaison Officer represents the using units in all matters pertaining to range firing and training
area usage.
d) The Liaison Officer will understand the responsibilities of, and will work closely with, the Training
Area Coordinator (TAC).
2
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
e) Attend the Range Control Annual Training Daily Coordination Meeting (held at 0800) to discuss
resources and scheduled training. The Liaison Officer must be prepared to discuss training up to four
days in advance.
1.3.6 Training Area Coordinator (TAC)
a) The individual designated by the RCO for the opening and closing of training areas/bivouac sites,
and other assigned duties.
b) Clears training areas and bivouac sites with the Liaison Officer, or other appointed personnel.
c) Maintains a list of training areas and bivouac sites being used by organizations in the field.
d) Maintains a list of restricted areas.
e) Keeps activity and training area maps current at the RCO.
1.3.7 Battalion/Squadron Commanders
a) Comply with the installation procedures for the certification of unit OICs, RSOs, and Laser Range
Safety Officers (LRSOs).
b) For commanders of field artillery, mortar, and MLRS battalions or indirect fire will establish and
maintain safety training and certification program to train and qualify personnel in safety procedures for
their specific areas of responsibility. Personnel who have not completed annual certification training will
NOT be appointed as an OIC or RSO.
c) Officers who have not completed their branch qualification course will not be able to OIC or RSO
FA, mortar, MLRS or indirect fire ranges.
d) Conduct risk management for all range operations.
1.3.8 Unit Commanders
a) Ensures compliance with DA Pamphlet 385-63, this Regulation, and any applicable TMs, FMs,
FMFMs (Marine Corps), TCs, and SOPs for safe training and firing for each weapon system within the
command.
b) Ensures that all personnel within the command are briefed on and comply with the installation
range procedures and safety requirements, including the use of required personal protective equipment.
c) Designates an OIC and RSO for each firing and/or maneuver exercise in accordance with OIC and
RSO Table 1-1, page 2. Officers that have not completed OBC and Warrant Officers that have not
completed WOBC (unless they were at least an E-5 prior to commissioning), are not authorized to be
OICs and RSOs on any Camp Ripley live-fire ranges.
d) Ensures that personnel performing the duties of OIC and RSO are certified IAW the established
installation safety certification program.
e) Complies with the range safety certification program guidance for OICs and RSOs, to ensure that
they are:
1) Competent and properly instructed in the performance of their duties.
2) Knowledgeable in the weapon systems for which they are held responsible and in safe
ammunition handling and use procedures.
3) Develops a SOP for laser operations, to include a provision for immediate medical attention for
personnel who incur eye or other overexposure to laser energy, and reporting laser overexposure
incidents IAW AR 385-40, TB MED 524, MIL-HDBK 828A, and MCO 5104.1.
4) Applies risk management, and develops controls and procedures for all phases of training
events.
1.3.9 Range Officer-in-Charge (OIC): Before commencing operations, training or firing, an OIC must
meet grade/rank requirements of Table 1-1, TAB K and must be Weapon Safety Certified IAW paragraph
1.2.1.
a) Must attend a Range Safety Briefing at the Range Control Office prior to scheduled use of a
range. The briefing is valid for a period of 90 days.
b) Confirms that the range/training area to be used is properly scheduled and verify that the particular
firing to be conducted is permitted on the range or in the training area scheduled for use.
c) The only person authorized to open and close the range with Range Control. MUST be on the
range at all times while the range is in an “Open” status.
d) Ensures that required communications are established and maintained.
e) Will not be assigned any additional duties while the range is open.
f) Ensures the overall safe conduct of training and proper use of the range. The ultimate
responsibility for safety rest with the OIC.
g) Ensures that the RSO is physically present on the range at all times.
h) Determines when it is safe to fire IAW applicable regulations and installation range requirements.
i) Ensures proper supervision of personnel performing misfire, hang-fire, and cook-off procedures.
j) Ensures safe laser operation
k) Ensures that adequate medical support is available and they are properly equipped.
3
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
l) Ensures that ammunition and explosives are properly handled, transported, stored, and accounted
for within the training complex from the time of receipt to the time of expenditure or turn-in.
m) Ensures plans for firing exercises and maneuvers are coordinated with Range Control.
n) Ensures control of the target areas to prohibit entry by unauthorized personnel.
o) Ensures all ammunition malfunctions and accidents are reported to Range Control IAW AR 75-1
and AR 385-40.
p) Ensures that Range Control has authorized the entrance of any civilian personnel into the training
complex.
q) Ensuring that medical support and range personnel are familiar with air and ground medical
evacuation procedures in accordance with this regulation. The senior medical personnel of the range
attends the range safety brief.
r) Briefs the RSO on the duties to be performed in support of the training event. Clearly establish the
requirement for the RSO to brief the OIC on the safety of the range and the unit, and the readiness to
commence live-fire operations prior to the start of firing.
s) Implements risk management in all phases of the training event.
t) Posts the CRTC Range Bulletin in a prominent place that is accessible to all soldiers.
u) upon completion of training exercises the OIC/Principle instructor or designated representative will:
1) Ensure that all weapons have been cleared of ammunition prior to removal from the firing line or
problem area. It is mandatory that a shakedown inspection be conducted after all live fire ranges have
completed their exercise.
2) Inspect the area and ensure that all explosive charges, booby trap materials, simulators and
pyrotechnics emplaced but not used are removed and turned in to the Ammunition Supply Point (ASP).
Explosives that cannot be removed will be detonated in place by Explosive Ordnance Demolition (EOD)
personnel. The OIC or designated representative will remain on site until given approval by RC that they
are clear and ok’d to leave the site.
3) Ensure compliance with Range Control’s Training and Range Area Clearance Procedures. (See
1.15 Clearance of Training Areas)
4) Ensure that unexpended ammunition, explosives or simulators are returned to the ASP. All
misfires need to be turned in the ASP. Do not discard misfires down range for any reason. This creates
a hazard (cook offs) to personnel in a fire situation.
1.3.10 Range Safety Officer (RSO) Before commencing operations, training or firing, an OIC must
meet grade/rank requirements of Table 1-1 (See TAB K OIC/RSO Requirements) and must be Weapon
Safety Certified IAW paragraph 1.2.1. The RSO must be physically present on the range prior to and
during any firing. The RSO represents the OIC and is responsible for complying with appropriate safety
publications, range regulations and adherence to these directives by all personnel participating in the
conduct of range activities. The RSO will not be assigned additional duties, which hinder the
accomplishment of his/her primary duty. In general, the RSO’s responsibilities include, but are not limited
to:
a) Must attend a Range Safety Briefing at the Range Control Office prior to scheduled use of a
range. The briefing is valid for a period of 90 days.
b) Being thoroughly indoctrinated in all the publications pertaining to the safety procedures for the
range, weapons and ammunition to be used.
c) Ensures that weapons and personnel are properly positioned.
d) Assuring that all personnel are briefed on the left and right limits for the range being fired and that
troops remain within the range boundaries. Brief all personnel to command “CEASE FIRE” if any unsafe
situation occurs.
e) Ensures that only authorized ammunition and explosives, to include proper charge, fuze, and fuze
settings are being used.
f) Ensures firing settings and weapons systems are within prescribed safety limits and are verified.
g) Assuring that all required roadblocks, barriers or guards are in position and that the danger area is
clear of personnel and equipment prior to firing.
h) Ensures that proper hearing and eye protection are being worn within the prescribed noise and
eye hazard areas.
i) Prior to commencing live-fire operations, conducts final coordination with the OIC. This
coordination will include a summary of checks, inspections, and actions that the RSO has completed, and
verifies that the required communications are established.
j) Orders an immediate cease-fire when any unsafe condition occurs.
k) Reports all accidents, weapon malfunctions, and ammunition malfunctions to the range OIC.
l) Verifies, upon completion of firing or firing order, to the OIC that all weapons and weapon systems
are clear and safe before allowing the removal of weapons from the firing area.
4
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
m) Properly briefs Assistant Range Safety Officers ARSO(s) (Line Safeties) on their duties. ARSO’s
duties does not relieve the RSO/OIC of their responsibilities.
1.3.11 Assistant Range Safety Officer(s) (ARSO) (Line Safeties): To maximize range operations
efficiency, it is suggested that units plan to have one (1) ARSO (Line Safety) for every two (2) firing lanes.
One ARSO (Line Safety) should not cover more than four (4) firing lanes.
a) Assist the RSO as directed by the OIC and/or RSO. Primary duty is to ensure that weapons are
clear and on “Safe” when Firers enter and exit the Firing Line.
b) Are not required to be Weapon Safety Certified, or to attend the Range Control Safety Briefing.
c) Must be knowledgeable on correct weapon misfire and malfunction procedures.
1.3.12 Medical Personnel: All military medical support personnel should be familiar with MEDCOM
PAM 40-12.
a) The senior medical person from the organization will attend the Range Control Briefing during IDT.
b) All medical personnel will attend a Range Control Briefing prior to their organization going down
range for AT. See TAB K for specific range Medical Support requirements.
1.4 RISK MANAGEMENT – SAFETY: The purpose of this section is not to replace regulations or SOP
safety policies but to provide brief summary as a reminder to the Users of the Camp Ripley downrange
training or operations, consistent with appropriate safety measures to prevent injury to personnel,
damage to equipment and property.
1.4.1 Obtain the Range Bulleting for all off-limit areas or training sites to minimize interruptions or
dangers to personnel downrange.
1.4.2 Impact Area and Unexploded Ordinance (UXO) Hazards – off limits to all personnel. Should you
experience unexploded ordinance or duds DO NOT TOUCH!!! Notify Range Control, mark the UXO
surrounding area and notify EOD personnel.
1.4.3 Risk management is a unit leadership responsibility (FM 5-19). Range Control personnel serve as
an excellent resource to help identify trends and potential hazards.
1.4.4 An Initial SIGNED copy of an CRM/ORM MUST be submitted to Range Control NLT 90 days
prior to the training event (i.e. live-fire, simunitions training, rappelling, water operations, and aerial
operations).
a) Civilian agencies conducting training downrange will utilize the Composite Risk Management
Worksheet DA Form 7566.
b) Sample Composite Risk Management Worksheet (DA Form 7566) Forms are provided in TAB B,
also refer to FM 5-19, and GRAT https://safety.army.mil.
c) Medevac Procedure – See 1.6
1.5 ACCIDENT/INCIDENT REPORTING: All accidents/incidents will be reported in accordance with
procedures outlined in AR 385-40 Accident Reporting and Records.
1.5.1 All accidents/incidents on any Camp Ripley range, or in the field training area, will be reported to
Range Control immediately by SINCGARS radio (36.100 primary, 36.900 alternate), Motorola radio, or by
telephone 320-616-3137/6026, utilizing the Range Accident/Incident Checklist (see TAB C) as a guide.
1.5.2 Malfunctions involving weapons, ammunition, and/or explosives will be reported in accordance
with AR 75-1.
1.6 MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS
1.6.1 Medical Support
a) Units/Civilian Agencies are responsible and required to have medical resources (personnel,
equipment and vehicles) for all live fire and non-live fire exercises.
1) Anything other than one required medical support on each range will need an exception of
policy submitted to range control.
b) If the unit’s medical assets leave the range for any reason, all ranges WILL be placed in a ceasefire status until the medical assets have returned.
c) It is the responsibility of the patients’s parent agency/unit to transport non-emergency patients
from the range to the TMC or off post medical facility during training.
1.6.2 All MEDEVAC requests will be coordinated through Range Control.
1.6.3 REFER to TAB K Range Control Tables for requirements on Medical Support
1.6.4 NOTE: DO NOT CALL 911, CALL RANGE CONTROL
5
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
1.7 REQUESTING RANGES AND TRAINING AREAS: CRTC utilizes the Range Facility Management
Support System (RFMSS) to schedule all Installation facilities and ranges.
1.7.1 For Inactive Duty Training (IDT):
a) Units request use of ranges and training areas directly in RFMSS, or by submitting an ATS Form
23 to the Operations Office NLT 90 days prior to requested date.
b) The Operations Office then reviews and confirms dates, and/or notifies the unit of any conflicts.
1.7.2 For Annual Training (AT):
a) The BN Training Officer will send Annual Training requests to the Operations Office.
b) Units will receive confirmation of the receipt of the request, and will be notified of any conflicts with
the request.
c) Annual Training conflict resolutions will be made during the annual Camp Ripley AT Conference,
by the Operations RFMSS Scheduler as reservations are being entered into RFMSS, or during the daily
(0800) Range Control Annual Training Coordination Meeting.
1.7.3 For ALL Un-Established ranges, DEMO ranges, and/or Live-Fire Exercises: OPLANS;
DEMO Plans with Wiring Diagrams; Target Scenarios; Target Matrices; Composite Risk
Management Worksheet (DA Form 7566)s must be submitted to Range Control NLT 90 days prior
to range usage.
1.7.4 NOTE: Units will not be able to add or change FIRING Ranges and/or Weapon Systems
within 72 hours of range utilization. An Exception to Policy Memorandum must be submitted to
Range Control by the BN S-3 for Change/Addition requests.
1.7.5 NOTE: No alcoholic beverages are permitted in the Field Training Area at any time, unless
an Exception to Policy has been approved by the Operations Officer, for the consumption of
alcohol at the defined Rest Areas, for morale and welfare purposes only. See sample in TAB J.
1.7.6 NOTE: Range Control personnel are authorized immediate access to all unit locations,
training areas, and ranges without interference from using units. Range Control personnel will
not interfere with training unless a safety violation is observed.
1.7.7 Units must ensure that they have the proper number and type of medical support personnel
available to support their requested ranges. See TAB K for the Range Specific Medical Support
Requirements table.
1.7.8 All Military Units and Civilian Lessees WILL order Portable Toilets from the Supply and
Services Warehouse at (320) 632-3128 for all activities scheduled in the field training area, except
for those ranges that have a classroom with latrine facilities in them. Any outside structured
latrine will not be utilized for Environmental reasons and pending deconstruction.
1.7.9 NOTE: All activities for use as an assembly area or bivouac site in the Field Training Area
are considered un-authorized without an approved usage request (RFMSS Reservation) from Post
Operations and/or Range Control.
1.8 ACCESS TO THE RANGES AND FIELD TRAINING AREA
1.8.1 Field Training Area Access Gates are located at the following locations:
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
L
M
Chickamauga Road and Armor Trail
Range Control (NOT for use by tracked vehicles)
Ft. Ripley Road north of North Motor Pool Road
Normandy Road at County Road 1
Enniskillen Road at County Road 1
Yalu Road at Installation Boundary
Arno Road at County Road 1
Ft Ripley Road and Armor Trail
Old Gravel Pit access at County Road 1
UM 9395105457
UM 9542006908
UM 9417206306
UM 8450613526
UM 8609121578
UM 8812731293
UM 8639325168
UM 9391305805
UM 8633123695
1.8.2 Keys required for all Gates listed above WILL be hand receipted from Range Control. Individual
will fully understand that there is a $50.00 replacement cost for each key if key(s) are lost.
6
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
1.8.3 NOTE: All Non-Tactical Vehicles MUST obtain a Range Control Vehicle Pass prior to
entering the Field Training Area and unmarked GSA’s are required to stop at RC also and obtain a
vehicle pass. Gov’t plates are not considered a marked vehicle. These vehicles MUST clear the
Field Training Area prior to the hours of darkness (prior to the need to turn on headlights), unless
they are supporting range operations or bivouac site, or in possession of a signed and approved
Camping Request.
1.8.4 NOTE: During the Winter months ALL PERSONNEL, regardless of what type of vehicle
they are operating, will stop in at Range Control to inform them about the purpose of the mission,
route of travel, and destination of the vehicle(s) going down range.
1.8.5 Military Wheeled Vehicles main access down range is through E Gate at Range Control.
1.8.6 Military Tracked Vehicles
a) Will enter and exit the Field Training Area through gates D, F, or L only.
b) NOTE: Tracked vehicles will not operate in any recreational areas, or in the designated
Winter Training Areas.
1.9 SPEED LIMIT ENFORCEMENT
1.9.1 Field Training Area:
a) Daylight hours: 25 MPH MAXIMUM on all roads.
b) Nighttime hours:
1) MSRs ONLY: 25 MPH MAXIMUM, with white lights
2) All other roads and trails: 15 MPH, with Blackout Drive
1.9.2 NOTE: When passing troops or anyone on the side of the road, SLOW DOWN to 10 MPH.
1.9.3 For any deviation in speed limit an Exception of Policy must be submitted to Range Control with
approval from the Installation Post Commander 48 hours in advance.
1.10 WHITE LIGHT USAGE POLICY: Range Control reserves the right to make daily changes to
this policy, to accommodate changes to specific unit training requests.
1.10.1 MSRs: White light usage is authorized at night. This includes the direct route (Champagne
Road, South Gettysburg Road, and Argonne Road) between Range Control and the A-Complex ranges.
(See TAB I for Authorized White Light Road Map).
1.10.2 All other roads and trails: White light usage is prohibited from use in the Field Training Area
during periods of darkness, with the exception of emergency vehicles involved in emergency situations.
Submit an Exception to Policy Request (see TAB H) to Range Control NLT 48 hours prior, to request an
exception to this policy from the RCO.
1.10.3 Night Vision Device (NVD) drivers training will be coordinated through Range Control NLT 48
hours prior. The unit must have a certified and licensed instructor, per AR 600-55.
1.11 PRIVATELY OWNED VEHICLES (POVs): Rental Vehicles, and ATVs are restricted from the field
training area, except for the following situations:
1.11.1 Due to a shortage of unit vehicles, unit personnel may utilize their POV, rental vehicle, GSA, or
TMP vehicle to travel between the Cantonment Area and the ranges. A Vehicle Pass must be obtained
from Range Control prior to accessing the Field Training Area.
1.11.2 Woodcutters, anglers, and overnight campers must obtain a Vehicle Pass (one for each vehicle)
from the Range Control Office. Overnight campers will be issued a key for E Gate, when the Range
Control Office will not be staffed overnight, for emergency use.
1.11.3 The Operations Officer may grant exceptions to this policy. The Exception to Policy Request
must be submitted NLT 48 hours prior.
1.11.4 All-Terrain Vehicles (ATVs), to include snowmobiles, are prohibited from operation on Camp
Ripley except as authorized by the Operations Officer. Exception is granted for maintenance use by the
Department of Public works at Training Site and use by Department of Natural Resources Conservation
Officers. Written requests for exception will be forwarded through the Camp Ripley Environmental Office
to the Range Officer for activities in the Field Training Area and the Chief of Security in the Cantonment
Area.
7
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
1.12 FISHING: Fishing is permitted on authorized lakes and the rivers during DAYLIGHT HOURS
ONLY. See the CRTC Regulation Fishing Policy for details. Persons may not enter the field training area
prior to sunrise and must return to the Cantonment Area prior to sunset. Due to military training requiring
blackout drive, headlights are not authorized in the Field Training Area during the hours of darkness.
1.12.1 Ice fishing is permitted on authorized lakes, during DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY. Range
Control and/or CRTC Environmental Staff measures ice depth and follows the MN DNR Minimum Ice
Depth Guidelines before authorizing personnel to be on the Installation Lakes. While icehouses are
permissible, they must be removed each day. No vehicles are authorized to be on the ice of any lake
within the Field Training Area (No Driving on the ICE).
1.13 USE OF FIELD TRAINING AREAS
1.13.1 The senior NCO of the unit using a training area is required to attend a Range Control Briefing at
Range Control, and complete a RC Form 18 (Training Area Opening/Closing Checklist) for each training
area or bivouac site to be occupied. All units must use these forms.
1.13.2 The senior NCO will act as the Point of Contact (POC) for each training area and bivouac site.
The POC will also be responsible for the requesting and return of all Class IV material. The POC, and a
cleaning detail, must be present at the clearance of each training area and bivouac site.
1.13.3 Because of area rejuvenation, the Camp Ripley Environmental Section will close some Training
Areas or bivouac sites. Units will not occupy a closed area. Closed areas will be posted.
1.13.4 When entering a training area, immediately report existing maneuver damage or litter to Range
Control. Failure to do so will result in the occupying unit being held responsible for the damage and litter.
1.13.4 Coordinate the blocking and unblocking of any roads or trails with the TAC or Range Control
NLT 48 hours prior to establishing the roadblock.
1.14 CONVOY/ROAD MARCHES
1.14.1 Convoys or road marches will meet the following requirements:
a) Must have a route overlay submitted for approval by Range Control 24 hours in advance
b) POC information will be submitted w/overlay to range control
c) Medical support while conducting operations (See TAB K, RC Medical Requirements Table)
d) The POC is responsible for police of areas when stop for rest or training
1.14.2 Convoys
a) Commanders may submit an Exception to Policy Request to increase the speed limit for convoy
driver training with Composite Risk Management Worksheet, and a Route Strip Map to the RC OIC.
1) The Exception of Policy is for DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY.
2) The map on TAB I depicts the Main Supply Routes (MSRs) that will support a 35 MPH
maximum speed during daylight hours.
3) If occupying a training area or range for training a route overlay will not need to be submitted to
Range Control for approval.
4) Exception of Policy must be submitted 48 hours in advance with approval from the Installation
Post Commander.
1.14.2 Road Marches
a) Units desiring to enter or exit a gate for road march purposes must coordinate with Range Control
for the gate they desire to use. Personnel on road marches will not climb fences to enter or exit the
restricted areas.
b) Units conducting foot road marches downrange during darkness will place traffic guards with
flashlights on similar lighting devices and reflective vest (or cross straps and sleevelets) approximately
100 meters to the front and rear of the column. The guards will be instructed to wave lights to attract the
attention of approaching traffic.
1.15 CLEARANCE OF TRAINING AREAS
1.15.1 Range Control personnel will inspect all training areas and bivouac sites before the using unit
may clear the post. Ensure the following is accomplished:
a) OIC, RSO, and sufficient personnel must be present during range clearance.
b) The using unit is responsible for policing the range area, range boundary to range boundary.
Remove all garbage, trash, and other debris from the field, and dispose of it at the Transfer Station
located near Range Control.
c) All buildings pertaining to the range or training area will be checked and must be thoroughly
cleaned and inventoried.
8
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
b) Fill in all fighting positions and restore the area to its original appearance.
1) NOTE: Do not use logs or trash as filler material when filling any fighting position.
e) Latrines will be checked for cleanliness. Latrines will be swept out, mopped, and paper products
replaced.
1) NOTE: It is prohibited to leave human waste on the surface of the ground.
f) Remove all forms of wire from training areas before clearing.
g) Remove and disassemble position barriers in the training area. Open all roads and trails before
clearing.
h) Some ranges have hand receipts posted to the ammo shed, classroom or in the tower and will be
inventoried by RC personnel during the clearance procedures.
i) Range Control will inspect the range and any missing items or damage to the range will be the
responsibility of the OIC of the range.
1.15.6 Prior to departing field training area(s): The POC for the training area will coordinate with the
Training Area Coordinator (TAC) to clear and close the field training areas. The TAC can designate RC
personnel to clear an area.
1.15.7 NOTE: USING UNITS MUST CONTACT RANGE CONTROL FOR SPECIFIC INDIVIDUAL
RANGE REQUIREMENTS FOR TARGET REPLACEMENT.
1.15 COMMUNICATIONS: Range Control operates the following means of communications:
1.15.1 Primary:
(1) SINCGARS: Primary-36.100
(2) SINCGARS: Secondary-36.900
(3) Motorola Handheld-Channel 1
1.15.2 Secondary:
Commercial phone: 320-616-3137/3134 or 320-412-6078/6075
1.15.3 NOTE: Military units are required to utilize SINCGARS as their Primary form of
communication. An Exception to Policy Request must be submitted by the Unit Commander to
Range Control NLT 72 hours prior to range/training area usage. All means of acquiring
SINCGARS capability must be attempted prior to authorizing the use of Motorola radios.
1.15.4 Additional Information:
a) All ranges must have two operating means of communication with Range Control at all times.
b) Personal cell phones can only be used as a secondary form of communication, due to cell phone
tower locations being outside the installation boundaries and dead space within the installation.
c) Cell phones must be turned on at all times. A telephone call must be made to Range Control prior
to down range movement and authorizing usage as a secondary form of communication. Another
telephone call to Range Control will be performed after arrival on the range.
d) Communications with Range Control will be made in the clear. Do not use unit SOI call
signs.
e) SINCGARS and Motorola radios are to be used for radio traffic to and from Range Control only.
They are not to be used for administrative purposes, except for emergency notification situations.
1.15.5 Live Fire Range Communication
a) Contact Range Control via the unit’s primary form of communication, upon occupation of, and
departure from, the ranges.
b) Request permission from Range Control to open, close, or change the firing status of the range on
the primary form of communication only.
c) Continuously monitor the primary form of communication.
d) Perform hourly communication checks (every hour, on the hour) while the range is “Open”.
e) Immediately cease-fire if communications with Range Control is lost.
1.15.6 Non-firing Range Communication
a) Request permission from Range Control to open and close the range on a primary form of
communication only.
b) Continuously monitor the primary form of communication while the range is “Open”, to be aware of
adverse weather conditions and for medical emergencies.
9
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
1.16 OBSERVATION POINTS:
1.16.1 OPs are required to “OPEN” first prior to the firing position going into an open status
and will open separately from the firing position.
1.16.2 OPs are required to open their location with Range Control on SINCGARS primary frequency
36.100, alternate frequency 36.900.
1.16.3 MORTAR AND ARTILLERY OPs
a) A red flag (and blinking red light at night) must be displayed.
b) Hourly (on the hour) communication checks must be performed while fire missions are being
conducted. When fire missions are completed, the OP will revert to a Non-Live Fire range status, and will
only be required to monitor the radio.
c) All Forward Observers (FO) (Mortar/Artillery) will have a safety fan for the unit they are supporting,
drawn on an overlay or a map, to determine that all rounds are landing within safety limits.
d FOs must establish communications with Range Control prior to the firing position being allowed to
open.
e) For Manual Call-For-Fire missions, a POC is responsible for opening and closing the range.
f) For Laser Call-For-Fire missions, an OIC and RSO will be present on the range.
g) Any projectile that bursts or lands outside safety limits, or any unobserved rounds, will require
immediate action and investigation, as outlined below to determine the cause.
1) Immediately, report the incident to Range Control using the Range Incident Checklist
(see TAB C).
2) Immediately, suspend firing of all FA units until the responsible unit is identified.
3) Continuous communication must be maintained with Range Control on SINCGARS primary
frequency 36.100, or alternate frequency 36.900.
1.16.4 The following OPs are available on Camp Ripley:
OP1
OP16
UM 91011463
UM 90162469
OP2
OP19
UM 91941565
UM 91622771
OP15
OP23
UM 91352280
UM 92852379
1.16.5 For laser usage on an OP refer to Chapter 16.
1.17 OE 254 Antennas: Thirteen radio antenna masts with OE 254 antenna heads are permanently
erected at various locations throughout the installation to extend radio communications capabilities.
Report any operating deficiencies to Range Control immediately. See below for list of Antenna Mast
locations. See TAB E for location map.
1.17.1 Some ranges are equipped with landline. See range descriptions in TAB E.
Antenna Mast Locations
MAST
LOCATION
NUMBER
Z-1
Range Control
Z-2
A-Complex
Z-3
Training Area 61
Z-4
Y-4 TTB
Z-5
Training Area 71
Z-6
Training Area 69
Z-7
OP 16
COORDINATES
UM95370686
UM91990868
UM95082437
UM95162684
UM88122886
UM86802508
UM90142468
MAST
NUMBER
Z-8
Z-9
Z-10
Z-11
Z-12
Z-13
LOCATION
COORDINATES
OP 15
Training Area 54
Training Area 40
OP 1
Range Control
CLFX AA (TA58)
UM91332287
UM87102204
UM85381612
UM91001464
UM95370686
UM92912305
NOTICE: Some ranges are equipped with landline. See range descriptions in TAB E.
1.18 SEVERE WEATHER : Range Control will disseminate all severe weather watches and warnings on
all communication forms. During inclement weather, the unit commander will decide when to institute
protective measures. Range Control personnel will open all unoccupied downrange classrooms to
provide shelter. Range Control and/or the Automated Tower Operators have the authority to stop all firing
due to the approach of an electrical storm.
1.19 MAPS
1.19.1 Refer to the following websites to order the Camp Ripley Special (NSN 7643-01-451-0524)
https://www.dscr.dla.mil/rmf/accounts/1832.htm or https://www.daas.dla.mil/daashome/daasc_home.asp.
10
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
1.19.2 Units may request customized maps for any Camp Ripley ranges or training areas by calling rc
at 320-616-3137/6006, or by e-mailing the request to: ngmn.CRCRANGECONTROL@ng.army.mil.
11
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 2 Ranges
2.1 RESTRICTING ACCESS TO IMPACT AREAS
2.1.1 Unauthorized persons are prohibited from entering the installation training complex. The
installation RCO is the approval authority for entry onto the ranges and maneuver areas, and into any
impact area.
2.1.2 Unauthorized persons are prohibited from entering impact areas and other areas known, or
suspected, to contain UXO by use of positive controls, to include fencing and UXO hazard warning signs.
2.1.3 Personnel who must enter into an impact area will be thoroughly briefed on the hazards of
unexploded ordnance, and accompanied by Range Control personnel.
2.1.4 Personnel access to impact areas will be limited to qualified EOD personnel, Range Control staff,
and range maintenance personnel designated by the RCO.
2.1.5 Unauthorized personnel are prohibited from handling UXO and munitions, or removing them from
the training complex. Procedures (for example, amnesty boxes) will be established for turn-in of
ammunition and explosives items by unauthorized personnel.
2.1.6 All approaches to ranges and impact areas will be guarded by range guards that are properly
instructed in their duties, or closed off by appropriate barriers, as determined by the RCO. When barriers
are used, appropriate signage will be posted on them.
2.2 WARNING SIGNS, BARRIERS, MARKERS, AND FLAGS
2.2.1 Barriers are erected to protect personnel from accessing danger areas. Barriers will be used to
block roads, trails, and other possible access points into danger areas. They will remain in place when
firing is in progress. Commanders will take prompt disciplinary action against personnel who breech
barriers.
2.2.2 Units will display daily Range Bulletins in prominent locations for the benefit of all personnel.
These bulletins depict all off-limits areas.
2.2.3 Barrier and Impact Area violations will require the following corrective actions:
a) Immediate cease-fire of affected training areas, ranges, and firing points.
b) Range Control personnel will physically check affected area, and detain any violators until a
written statement is obtained, describing the incident.
c) The Unit Commander will be notified, and must submit a written Incident Report (Appendix C) to
the Post Commander, through the Operations Officer. The RCO is authorized to establish additional
perimeter or interior guard posts at any time.
d) The RCO will lift the cease-fire upon receipt of the Incident Reports. The violating unit's
commander must provide a written statement that all personnel are clear of the off-limits areas.
e) MN Statute 609.396. UNAUTHORIZED PRESENCE AT CAMP RIPLEY.
1) Subdivision 1.Misdemeanor: A person is guilty of a misdemeanor if the person intentionally
and without authorization of the adjutant general enters or is present on the Camp Ripley Military
Reservation.
2) Subdivision 2.Felony: A person is guilty of a felony and may be sentenced to not more than
five years imprisonment or to payment of a fine of not more than $10,000, or both, if:
(a) the person intentionally enters or is present in an area at the Camp Ripley Military
Reservation that is posted by order of the adjutant general as restricted for weapon firing or other
hazardous military activity; and
(b) the person knows that doing so creates a risk of death, bodily harm, or serious property
damage.
2.2.4 The RSO will post interior range guards (as required) at specified ranges/firing points, or at the
direction of the RCO.
2.2.5 A red range flag must be displayed from a prominent point at each range, firing point, and
observation post during firing. No firing will take place unless a red range flag is displayed. All firing will
cease prior to lowering the flag.
2.2.6 Red blinking lights must be displayed in addition to the red range flag during the hours of
darkness. Battery operated lanterns are available at Range Control.
2.3 RANGE USE BY NON-MILITARY/CIVILIAN AGENCIES
2.3.1 Use of ranges and training areas by civilian agencies is authorized.
a) Procedures for requesting use are outlined in the CRTC Post Regulation, available through the
Camp Ripley Operations Office, located in Bldg. 11-1. Telephone number is (320) 616-2708. All leasing
costs and requirements are available in the same document.
12
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
b) Civilian agency, or supervisor in charge of training, will appoint in writing an OIC and a RSO for
each range requested. This appointment must specify that the individual is safety certified for the specific
weapon(s) to be used. See TAB J, Page 2 for sample Safety Certification Memorandum.
c) If a civilian agency has no certifying official, the Completion of a National Rifle Association
Instructor Course or equivalent, is approved for any individual performing the duty of OIC and RSO on
small arms ranges.
d) The following are equivalent course model programs that are approved by Range Control:
1) DNR Firearms Instructor Courses
2) State of MN Firearms Instructor Courses
3) Police Officer Firearms Instructor Courses
e) All other equivalent course certification(s) (excluding above-mentioned courses) will be submitted
to Range Control in advance of range use, for review and approval. Equivalent Course POI’s should
have covered at a minimum the following:
1) Range Operations & Organization
2) Range Communications
3) Medical Support and Equipment
4) Weapon misfire procedures
2.3.2 The Operations Officer must approve all civilian access to the field training area.
a) Civilian personnel, such as military family members, and the local populace, must receive
authorization from the Operations Officer to enter the field training area to participate in, or observe
capability exercises, firepower demonstrations, training courses, competitions, or other types of exercises.
Such personnel will remain in designated safe areas as determined by the RCO.
b) Inspection Team members or other official observers required to be on the firing line, firing position,
or firing area, as an exception to policy, will position themselves in safe areas, as determined by the
RCO.
c) Civilians, to include family members and DOD civilians, must have approval from the
installation/community RCO to fire weapons within the installation training complex, per DA Pamphlet
385-63.
2.4 COORDINATING USE OF SPECIAL USE AIRSPACE
2.4.1 All SUAS units will coordinate with Range Control through RFMSS for the requested training
area. Once approved by Range Control, the training area the SUAS occupies shall become a ROZ
during operations. SUAS will only operate within their assigned ROZ.
2.4.2 Coordination for flight and ROZ activation will be conducted through Range Control. Range
Control shall treat the ROZ in a manner similar to that of a hot range and relay pertinent information to
Miller Tower/Ops, such as opening and closing. There are three instances in which immediate SUAS
aircraft operating within a ROZ will contact Miller Tower/Ops directly:
a) Upon initial occupation of Training Area before first flight.
b) In the event of a ‘lost link.’
c) Anytime the SUAS is flown outside of the ROZ and/or R-4301
2.4.3 Miller Tower: DSN 871-2781 COMM (320)616-2781
2.4.4 Miller Operations (use when tower is closed): DSN 871-2779 COMM (320)616-2779
2.4.5 Communications will be established by FM radio or cell/SAT phone with Range Control. Range
Control will notify Miller Tower before allowing the ROZ to become active.
2.4.6 SUAS do not require a COA. A SUAS mission must remain within the designated ROZ inside R4301. The ROZ will be opened and closed like ranges and training areas. Max density within the ROZ is
two SUAS airframes aloft at one time.
2.4.7 SUAS radio operators will contact Range Control via FM radio upon occupation of the training
area.
2.4.8 SUAS radio operators will notify Range Control when they have concluded flight operations.
Range Control will notify Miller Tower that the ROZ is no longer active.
2.4.9 SUAS lateral maneuver, launch and recovery will be restricted to the confines of the Restricted
Operating Zone (ROZ). The Confines of the ROZ include the lateral limits as well as the vertical limit of
1,500’ AGL.
2.4.10 The standard lost link point for SUAS is the takeoff point within the ROZ. Upon notification of lost
link, the operator shall immediately notify Miller Tower and Range Control.
Upon notification Miller Tower shall:
a) Issue advisories and ATC instructions as appropriate to ensure the safe operation of all aircraft
training in R-4301.
b) Cease aircraft departures until status of affected SUAS/UAS is determined.
13
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
c) Recover other SUAS/UAS as appropriate.
2.5 UAS OPERATIONS
2.5.1 Multiple SUAS platoons: may conduct training utilizing the same launch and recovery area
provided the following minimum conditions are met (if approved).
a) Platoons must have conducted coordination and agree to the on site location(s), frequency usage,
and other established de-confliction standards and procedures deemed appropriate.
b) The SUAS will maintain at least 1,000’ horizontal and/or 500’ vertical separation from each other
during the mission.
c) Prior to conducting a climb or descent, the SUAS platoon will coordinate with the other SUAS
platoon to ensure they are clear of the designated climb/descent routes.
2.5.2 Operating Altitudes
a) To provide separation between SUAS/UAS and manned aircraft, the following restrictions apply
unless otherwise authorized by the AT&A Officer and cleared by Miller Tower.
1) The SUAS will be restricted to a maximum altitude of 1,500’ AGL in their assigned ROZ unless
otherwise dictated for a different altitude by range control.
2) SUAS will be separated by utilization of a ROZ and will never mix with manned aircraft. Shadow
aircraft may be mixed with manned aircraft only within the confines of the restricted area, R-4301 and
shall have lateral and/or vertical separation provided by ATC.
3) Shadow UAS are the only UAS authorized to operate in Class D. While in Class D, manned and
unmanned aircraft shall not mix. When manned and unmanned aircraft are operating concurrently within
R-4301, positive radio communications along with Air Traffic Control assigned vertical separation will be
maintained at all times.
2.5.3 Range Control will place all affected live-fire ranges in a Check-fire status when notified by the
Miller Army Airfield Control Tower.
2.5.4 The Check-fire will be lifted AFTER the MAAF Control Tower notifies Range Control that all
aircraft have departed the airspace.
2.6 COORDINATING USE OF NAVIGABLE WATERWAYS
2.6.1 General
a) Safety requirements for water/ice-crossing training are similar to range firing, with the exception
that a range flag is not required.
1) Request permission from Range Control to open and close the range on a primary form of
communication only.
2) Continuously monitor the primary form of communication while the range is “Open”, to be aware
of adverse weather conditions and medical emergencies.
3) The site must have a medical aid person, aid bag, litter, litter capable vehicle with operating
radio, and a Camp Ripley map.
b) The following procedures outline the minimum requirements for safety during over-water/ice
training exercises.
1) Submit a written Operations Plan and Composite Risk Management Worksheet (DA Form 7566)
to Range Control, NLT 90 days prior.
2) The OIC and RSO must be safety certified by the Battalion Commander (O-4P or above) for
over-water/ice operations.
c) The OIC and RSO will attend a Range Safety Briefing at Range Control prior to training.
d) Ensure all over-water/ice OPLANs include adequate safety and accident prevention measures,
and rescue procedures to perform water training safely.
2.6.2 River Operations
a) Commanders of units participating in river/lake/ice operations will ensure unit SOPs address all
aspects of safety for equipment and facilities being used.
b) Commanders of units will ensure all applicable TCs and ARs are used in the development of their
SOP, specifically:
1) TC 21-21 Army Water Survival Training
2) AR 385-10 The Army Safety Program
(a) Tactical Water Safety Operations, Chapter 13, Paragraph 8, Page 62
(b) Water Operations, Chapter 22, Paragraph 2, Page 79
2.6.3 Wheeled/Tracked Vehicle Water/Ice-Crossing Operations
a) Units will follow guidelines and SOP IAW FM 3-34.343.
b) Commanders will ensure unit SOPs address all safety aspects of equipment and facilities in use.
c) All personnel aboard each vehicle crossing the water will have approved life vests.
14
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
d) Crossing vehicles must have a functioning inter-communications system and maintain continuous
contact with the RSO.
e) Wheeled and/or tracked vehicles will NOT be on the ice of any lake within the Field Training Area,
unless they are part of a military Ice-Crossing training exercise.
2.7 AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVE ITEMS ON RANGES
2.7.1 Smoking: Smoking is prohibited at firing pads, ready storage sites, and assembly sites. "No
Smoking” signs will be prominently displayed. Smoking is also prohibited on any vehicle used to
transport propellants or explosives. The possession of matches or any other flame-producing device
while working with, or transporting, propellants or explosives is not allowed, except as required for a
particular operation.
2.7.2 Positioning and Issuing Ammunition and Explosives: Ammunition, explosives, and
pyrotechnics will be positioned to minimize the potential for ignition from external sources, explosion,
rapid burning, or sympathetic detonation, and will be located and stored IAW DA Pam 385-63 Range
Safety and DA Pam 385-64 Ammunition and Explosives Safety Standards.
2.7.3 NOTE - Safeguarding, handling, and protection of ammunition and explosives against the
elements is a unit responsibility.
2.7.4 The following conditions must be followed with any ammunition that is stored on the ranges:
a) Two Fire Extinguishers, fully charged, and within their expiration date. (Type 10BC, per the CRTC
LOG Support Procedures SOP, and DA PAM 385-64)
b) NOTE: Fire extinguishers can be obtained from Camp Ripley Supply and Services (S&S).
c) Placed on pallets.
d) Placed in a dry place.
e) Must be covered by a tarpaulin to protect from sparks, direct sunlight, and weather.
f) Ammunition will not be stored within 1250 feet/381 meters of the field training area boundary, IAW
DA PAM 385-64, Table 5-1.
g) Proper placard displayed on vehicles.
h) “No Smoking Within 50 Feet” signs must be posted.
i) The site must always be guarded.
j) Technical Bulletin 43-0250, dated 03 DEC 2007, and any Safety of Use Messages (SUOMs) or
Ammunition Information Notices (AINs) for ammunition being fired.
k) Distribution of ammunition to personnel will occur only in areas designated for that purpose, for
example, ammunition breakdown buildings, ready lines, firing lines, attack positions, assembly areas, or
defilade positions. Blank and live-fire ammunition will not be stored in, or issued from, the same building,
at the same time.
l) Fuel and ammunition re-supply operations and points will be located a minimum of 300 meters
apart.
m) Limit the unpacking of ammunition at the breakdown building, ammunition transfer point, or firing
line to the minimum number of rounds needed for efficient firing of the exercise. Packaging material,
propelling increments and fuzes will be retained until firing is complete. Units will not burn wooden
containers, or indiscriminately fire or dispose of ammunition to preclude its return to a storage facility.
n) All ammunition unpacked for firing, but not fired, will be repackaged into its original packing
configuration prior to return to the Ammunition Supply Point, Bldg. 24-199, (320) 616-3167/3169.
o) Ammunition that is easily degraded by short-term exposure to moisture, such as propelling
charges, pyrotechnic signals, and simulators, will be unpacked only for the minimum amount of time
consistent with mission requirements.
p) Small arms ammunition and pyrotechnics may be stored in the Cantonment Area if sufficient
safety and security measures are taken, in accordance with Army Regulation 190-11 Physical Security of
Arms, Ammunition, and Explosives. Any other ammunition will not be stored within the Cantonment Area.
Storage requirements may be coordinated with the Camp Ripley Ammunition Office.
q) All ammunition, explosives, and pyrotechnics must be transported in accordance with 49 CFR.
1) All personnel transporting ammunition, explosives, and pyrotechnics must have completed the
Hazardous Material Transportation Course.
2) All vehicles must have proper placards while transporting ammunition, explosives, and
pyrotechnics.
15
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
r) All units operating an Ammunition Transfer Point (ATP) will conduct operations IAW DA PAM 385-
64.
2.7.5 Qualification and Restriction of Ammunition and Explosives
a) The use of nonstandard ammunition and explosive items is strictly prohibited.
b) Field expedient explosive devices as prescribed by applicable FMs and TMs are authorized for
use, contingent on the approval of the RCO. A risk management assessment and an item specific SOP
must be submitted before approval will be granted.
c) Do not use live ammunition, and items that contain explosives or propellants, as training aids for
classroom instruction.
d) Unit ammunition personnel will be familiar with inherent hazards of specific types of ammunition,
proper identification markings, and color codes.
e) Certified ammunition must be used for exercises that require overhead fire of unprotected troops
(that is, certified propellant, projectile, and fuze). List of certified ammunition is available at the
Ammunition Supply Point, Bldg. 24-199, (320) 616-3167/3169.
f) Only approved munitions listed in the Munition History Program at:
https://mhp.redstone.army.mil/modules/Notices/AppendixB.aspx will be fired on Camp Ripley.
g) Ammunition determined to be defective will not be fired. It will be reported to the Ammunition
Officer or Quality Assurance Specialist-Ammunition Surveillance (QASAS) immediately. Examples of
defective ammunition are:
1) Fuzes or fuzed rounds that are inadequately tightened, insecurely staked, or are missing safety
devices.
2) Safe and arming mechanisms, if so equipped, are in the “armed” position.
3) Ammunition showing deterioration.
4) Ammunition showing evidence of defects in material or assembly.
5) Ammunition that has been dropped, and there is visible damage.
6) Ammunition and unopened ammunition packaging which shows evidence of tampering will not
be issued until it is cleared by the QASAS or ASP Officer.
2.7.6 Suspension of Ammunition and Explosives Involved in Malfunctions
a) When any round or item of ammunition, explosives, or their components malfunctions, the firing
unit will notify Range Control immediately. Range Control will then notify the Ammunition Officer or the
QASAS. The OIC and RSO will suspend the use of the lot in question.
b) The Camp Ripley Ammunition Manager will substantiate, or withdraw, the suspension,
per AR 75-1.
c) Any suspended ammunition will not be fired in training.
d) Firing of any “restricted” ammunition will be conducted only in accordance with the restriction
requirements.
2.8 MISFIRE PROCEDURES/REPORTING
2.8.1 NOTE: Misfire is failure of a round to fire.
2.8.2 Misfire procedures in Technical Manuals (TMs) for the appropriate weapon system will be
followed. In the event Misfires present an immediate hazard to personnel, IMMEDIATELY report the
type of round, the location, unit, and give the point-of-contact information of the individual having
knowledge of the Misfire to Range Control.
2.8.3 When dud and misfire rates equal or exceed the rates given in Appendix B of AR 75-1, the
affected lot(s) will be recorded as a malfunction, and reported to the Ammunition Supply Point
immediately.
2.8.4 A Misfire of any serial numbered munition MUST be reported to Range Control and the ASP
immediately.
2.9 UNEXPLODED ORDNANCE (UXO) REPORTING
2.9.1 NOTE: UXO (Duds) are munitions which have been fired or projected, and are armed, but
have failed to function.
16
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
2.9.2 The range OIC will report all UXO (dud) ammunition to Range Control. In the case of grenades or
other munitions that may be immediately hazardous to personnel, firing will be halted and the range
will be closed until qualified EOD personnel clear the dud. In all other cases, firing will not be halted.
Notify Range Control to fill out a Explosive Ordnance Incident Report, DA Form 3265. Units must
also remember to enter Dud information into TAMIS.
a) Leave all duds untouched and in place, to include rounds observed striking the impact area, but
fail to detonate.
b) If found outside of impact area, mark the area.
c) Route traffic a safe distance around them, and report to Range Control immediately. The report
must include the following information:
1) Type and size of dud.
2) Location by grid coordinate with other descriptions to pinpoint dud. Prepare a map overlay
indicating location of dud, and submit to Range Control, upon request.
3) Name, Rank, and Unit of individual reporting the dud.
2.10 DISPOSITION OF AMMUNITION AND EXPLOSIVES INVOLVED IN MALFUNCTIONS AND
ACCIDENTS
2.10.1 Materiel involved in malfunctions or accidents and any evidence, such as components or
fragments of the weapon system, ammunition, missile, or rocket will be carefully preserved in the position
and location it occupied at the time of the accident. If the material has been involved in a Class A or B
accident, it will remain in place until disposition is directed by the Investigating Officer, unless immediate
hazard to life or property are present.
a) Class A Accident
1) Property damage is $1,000,000.00 or more, and/or
2) Is an aircraft or missile destroyed, abandoned, or missing, and/or
3) Is there an injury and/or occupational illness resulting in a sudden death fatality or permanent
total disability?
b) Class B Accident
1) Is property damage > $200,000.00 but < $1,000,000.00, and
2) Is there an injury and/or occupational illness resulting in a permanent partial disability, or were
three
3) 3 or more personnel hospitalized as a result of a single occurrence?
c) Damaged or malfunctioned guided missiles and rockets will be reported IAW AR 75-1, and
handled per the applicable TM.
2.11 AMMUNITION TURN-IN PROCEDURES
2.11.1 All ammunition will be returned to the ASP with 100% accountability IAW DA Pam 710-2-1,
Appendices J and K; and the Camp Ripley ASP External SOP (Post Regulation, Chapter 4, 4-8,
paragraph c).
2.11.2 All munitions and pyrotechnics will be sorted by type and lot number.
2.11.3 Ammunition by-products, such as canisters from expended containers, hand held flares, etc., will
be returned to the ASP.
2.11.4 Usable returned munitions and pyrotechnics will not be mixed with misfires. See 2.6.7 for Misfire
procedures.
2.11.5 NOTE: Small arms residue MUST be returned to the ASP in this manner:
2.11.6 Expended cartridge cases will be inspected for live rounds, and will be free of dirt, rocks, grass,
and any litter. They must be segregated by type and placed in wooden ammunition wire-bound boxes, or
the commercially packaged cardboard ammunition boxes, prior to turn-in. Metal cans will be returned
empty. One hundred percent (100%) accountability is required for all ammunition and residue.
2.11.7 Care must be exercised to maintain packing material in a serviceable condition.
2.11.8 All residue will be inspected by a representative of the ASP.
2.11.9 NOTE: TURN-INS THAT DO NOT COMPLY WITH THE ABOVE CONDITIONS WILL BE
REJECTED, AND DEFICIENCIES WILL BE CORRECTED BEFORE BEING ACCEPTED BY THE ASP.
2.11.10 Corrective action WILL be accomplished by the unit prior to re-inspection and acceptance of
salvage material by the ASP.
17
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
2.11.11 NOTE: After firing, commanders must conduct inspections to ensure personnel do not
possess or have access to live ammunition.
2.11.12 Destruction of UXO: Only EOD personnel will accomplish destruction of dud
ammunition.
2.11.13 Policing the Training Complex
a) Removal of spent brass, unfired rounds, or components of fired rounds from the Impact Areas is
prohibited.
b) Dumping and/or burying of ammunition or explosives into the Training Areas and/or Impact Areas
is prohibited.
c) Unauthorized removal of ammunition, pyrotechnics, explosives, and residue from munitions from
the training complex is prohibited.
d) The collection of spent brass is 50% required when blank ammunition is expended from mounted
or dismounted weapons over extended terrain.
2.11.14 Amnesty Program: Camp Ripley recognizes the need for an Ammunition Amnesty
Program. All military amnesty ammunition can be turned in at the Ammunition Office, Bldg. 24199, 320-616-3167/3168/3169 during normal business hours. There is also an Amnesty Box
located at the south entrance to the building for non-business hours deposits.
2.11.15 Ammunition References
a) FM 4-30.13
b) FM 4-30.51
c) DA PAM 710-2-1
d) AR 75-1
e) DA PAM 385-64
f) NGR 385-64
g) AR 385-10
h) TB 9-1300-38
i) AR 190-11
j) CRTC ASP External SOP
2.12 RANGE PERSONAL PROTECTIVE EQUIPMENT REQUIREMENTS
2.12.1 Training casualties on operational ranges must be minimized through the use of appropriate
personal protective equipment (PPE). PPE levels are found in table 2-2. Ultimately, the commander must
decide the appropriate level of PPE based on thorough risk assessment.
2.12.2 All personnel within the hearing hazard zone will wear approved hearing protection. The size of
the hazard zone varies with the weapon. The following list of distances to the hazard contours for
common military weapons is conservative:
a) .50 caliber: 55 m to the side, 12 m to the rear.
b) .45 caliber: 12 m to the side, 4.5 m to the rear.
c) 9 mm: 9 m to the side, 6 m to the rear.
d) 7.62 mm: 20 m to the side, 8 m to the rear.
e) 5.56 mm: 24 m to the side, 6 m to the rear.
2.12.3 WARNING: Per Ammunition Information Notice (AIN) 053-10, dated 10FEB10, DODIC:
AA54 DOUBLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS AND MUFFS) AND EYE PROTECTION
(GOGGLES) SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDIERS FIRING THE SHOTGUN AND BY SOLDIERS
WITHIN 8.5 METERS OF THE WEAPON DURING DOOR BREACHING OPERATIONS WHEN FIRING
IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO REFLECTIVE SURFACE. ALL SOLDIERS WITHIN 8.5 METERS TO 30
METERS OF THE FIRING POINT SHOULD WEAR SINGLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS OR
MUFFS). REFERENCE TM 9-1005-338-13&P, TECHNICAL MANUAL UNIT AND DIRECT SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL, MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN, MODEL 500 AND MOSSBERG 12
GAUGE SHOTGUN MODEL 590, MAY 2005.
2.12.4 Approved eye protection (or eye armor) is encouraged, especially during force-on-force training
maneuvers or scenarios by personnel undergoing training, as well as those in close proximity (for
example, evaluators, observers, and very important persons.)
2.12.5 For Personal protective levels refer to Table 2-2 (Personal protective equipment) of the DA Pam
385-63)
18
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
2.12.6 NOTE: All personnel must wear the Kevlar Helmet (or ACH) and IBA when required by
regulation, FM, or SOP. When it is not specifically required, wearing of the Kevlar Helmet (or ACH)
is at the Commander's discretion. All personnel occupying a Live-Fire range or Firing Point will
utilize hearing protection devices and eye protection when required.
2.13 RANGE TARGETS
2.9.1 General Requirements for Targets and Target Mechanisms
a) Target types are locally manufactured, as prescribed in TC 25-8 Training Ranges, or commercially
purchased prefabricated targets.
b) Requests for targets will be made NLT 90 days in advance.
c) All issue and receipt of targets, and target accessories, will be handled through the Automated
Target Systems (ATS) Office, Bldg.2-198, 320-616-3132/3133, or at Range Control, Bldg.24-199, 320616-3137/3134.
d) Using units are responsible for the setup, maintenance, and cleanup of all target materials.
e) Target accessories (lifters, thermals, batteries, chargers, etc.) are available at ATS.
f) ATS personnel will operate, or provide guidance for operation of, target lifting devices.
g) Using units can hand receipt a Target Repair Kit from Automated Target Systems, for all types of
target repair needs.
2.13.2 Moving Targets
a) Armor Moving Target Carriers (AMTC) are available on selected ranges.
b) Upon request, movers may be fitted with Target Kill Simulators, Hostile Fire Lamps, or Hostile Fire
Simulators.
2.13.3 Ground Targets
a) Small Arms
1) Enhanced Remote Target Systems (ERETS) small lifters are stationary, and used for
familiarization and qualification on selected small arms ranges (see range descriptions, TAB A).
2) Targets for these ranges will be the standard E or 3D type as prescribed in TC 25-8.
3) Targets are maintained by ATS personnel.
4) Due to time constraints, targets will not be changed on the day of firing.
5) Selected targets have Muzzle Flash Simulators for night fire use.
b) Tank/Bradley Ranges
1) ERETS heavy lifters are used for familiarization and qualification on selected ranges (see range
descriptions, TAB A, Miller Complex section).
2) Upon request, heavy lifters may be fitted with Target Kill Simulators, Hostile Fire Lamps, or
Hostile Fire Simulators.
2.13.4 Radio Controlled Targets
a) M31 Infantry Target lifters and Heavy lifters are portable and available for use on Camp Ripley,
with approval from Range Control, and coordination with Automated Target Systems.
b) Infantry Target lifters are designed for use with single or double infantryman type targets only (E,
Double E, or 3D type holders must be manufactured).
2.13.5 Human Form Targets: Human Form Targets (HFTs) are three-dimensional precision targets
that replicate male and female enemy (uniformed with weapons and equipment), non-combatant male
and female, and combatant non-uniformed male/female/child. The HFTs on Camp Ripley will only be
used to depict Non-combatant Civilians-on-the-Battlefield (COBs). Under no circumstances will the
HFTs be fired at with live ammunition!
19
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 3 Danger Zones
3.1 GENERAL
3.1.1 NOTE: For all established ranges a copy of the SDZ will be in the range packet you sign for
at Range Control and for unestablished ranges you will need to obtain an approved copy of the
SDZ that has been verified prior to opening.
3.1.2 NOTE: Every weapon system and the ammunition/ordnance related to that weapon system
requires a danger zone. The danger zones in DA PAM 385-63, chapter 3 represent minimum safety
requirements.
3.2 AUTHORIZATION FOR PERSONNEL WITHIN DANGER ZONES
3.2.1 The following personnel are authorized to be within a danger zone, subject to the restrictions in
the applicable sections of the this regulation, DA PAM 385-63, and application of the risk management
process by the senior installation commander.
a) Crews directly involved in the firing of a weapon system or munition
b) Tactical air control party or joint terminal attack controllers (JTACs) controlling aviation ordnance
deliveries.
c) Canon launched guided projectile (Copperhead) fire support team (FIST) personnel located in the
mission essential area (MEA). FIST personnel will only be allowed within the SDZ when the Copperhead
is not fired in the ballistic mode.
d) Aircrew operating within danger zones as part of an exercise.
e) During indirect field artillery firing personnel may be in Areas A through E subject to the restrictions
in chapter 10 of this regulation and DA PAM 385-63.
f) Designator operators (laser) during AGM–114 HELLFIRE antitank guided missile operations.
g) Personnel down range when approved overhead small arms ammunition is fired.
h) Personnel wearing approved laser eye protection within the laser surface danger zone.
i) Personnel down range when supporting training on known distance firing ranges, when protection
is provided.
j) Authorization of any other personnel within danger zones requires deviation approval per AR 385–
63/MCO 3570. 1C and paragraph 1–4 of DA PAM 385-63.
20
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 4 Small Arms & Machine Guns
4.1 FIRING CONDITIONS
4.1.1 The following ranges are available for a variety of courses of fire, for small arms weapons and
machine guns: (For detailed information on the below ranges, see TAB A)
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-9
A-12
A-14
B-1
B-2
Center
CLFX
CRACK
HOUSE
D
East
Small Arms Known Distance
Combat Pistol Qualification
Automated Record Fire
Automated Record Fire
M320 Training Practice Ammo
25m Zero
Live Fire Facility
25m Zero
25m Zero
Multi-Purpose Range (MPR)
Convoy Live Fire Exercise
Non-Standard Small Arms
Shotgun/Short Range Marksmanship
Multi-Purpose Range (MPR)
F
F&M-1
F&M-2
IPBC
ISBC
J
M
MK-19
North
OP-7
OP-23
SEAL
CABIN
UAC
West
Biathlon Course/25m Zero
Fire and Movement
Fire and Movement
Infantry Platoon Battle Course
Infantry Squad Battle Course
M320, M2, M240, MK-19 (TP-T Only)
25m Zero/Mortar SRTR
MK-19 Qualification (TP-T Only)
M2, M240, M249
MK-19 HE
MK-19 HE
Non-Standard Small Arms
Urban Assault Course (5.56 & 40mm TP)
Multi-Purpose Range (MPR)
4.1.2 Small arms may be fired at other locations when the following conditions exist:
a) The Surface Danger Zone can be employed without significant impact on other range operations
or training areas.
b) The RCO has approved the location.
c) An operations safety plan and a Composite Risk Management Worksheet (DA Form 7566) have
been developed by the unit, detailing the measures they will take.
d) All other conditions for live fire exist as outlined in paragraph 2-3 (Range Use by nonmilitary/civilian agencies).
e) NOTE: The batwing will be considered when designing or conducting training on ranges
that involve fire and movement, fire and maneuver, flanking fire, and/or when ricochet hazards
outside the range boundary may endanger nonparticipating personnel. Decision on the use of
batwing will be based on level of risk and approval of appropriate command risk acceptance
authority. An Exception to Policy memo will be submitted to Range Control to be verified and
sent through channels for approval by the Camp Ripley Post Commander. (per DA Pam 385-63,
para 4-1c)
4.2 OVERHEAD FIRE
4.2.1 Overhead small arms fire above protected troops is authorized when minimum protection (shown
in Table 6-1 DA Pam 385-63) is provided.
4.2.2 Overhead fire above unprotected troops with small arms may be conducted when authorized by
the Post Commander and specifically approved by the RCO.
4.2.3 Weapon systems authorized for overhead fire of unprotected troops are 5.56 mm, 7.62 mm, and
.50 caliber machine guns. The weapons must be on ground tripods, or in vehicle mounts (ring mounts
excluded) firing from a stationary position.
4.2.4 Only ammunition certified as cleared for overhead fire in TB 9-1300-385 will be used. NSN and
DOD Ammunition Code identify small arms ammunition certified for overhead fire of unprotected troops.
4.2.5 Rates of fire will not exceed 70 rounds per minute for 5.56 mm and 7.62 mm machineguns, and
40 rounds per minute for .50 caliber machineguns. Tracer ammunition may be used to assist in
monitoring projectile paths.
4.2.6 Overhead fire with machineguns in live fire exercises will follow these procedures:
a) Firing positions for weapons delivering overhead fire will provide unobstructed fields of fire.
b) Applicable ballistic firing tables will be used to determine the minimum angle of elevation for all
overhead fire. Projectiles will not be permitted to impact between the firing position and unprotected
troops downrange. All impacts will be at least 30 meters beyond the personnel most distant from the
weapon.
21
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
c) Positive stops must be used to prevent crossfire and depression of weapon systems during
overhead firing.
d) Weapon systems will be test fired before delivery of overhead fire to verify the effectiveness of the
positive traverse and depression stops.
4.3 FLANKING FIRE
4.3.1 Ground-mounted or vehicle-mounted small arms may be used to provide low angle flanking fire
when a minimum angle of 15 degrees between the limit of fire and exposed troops is maintained.
4.3.2 Positive means will be employed to ensure that the firing unit knows the location of the maneuver
units while fire support is being provided.
4.3.3 The route and location of maneuver units and the location of the weapons providing flanking fire
support will be described in detail using recognizable natural or manmade terrain features, or other
positive identification features to all involved personnel.
4.4 BLANK AMMUNITION
4.4.1 NOTE: Per NGR 385-63, Chapter 4, paragraph 4-6, an OIC/RSO with the rank of E-5 or
above is required when using Blank ammunition.
4.4.2 NOTE: When using blank ammunition on any range or training area you are required to
use the BLANKS/SIMUNITIONS/LESS-LETHAL RANGES OPENING/CLOSING CHECKLIST.
4.4.3 NOTE: The use of blank ammunition does not require a range flag.
4.4.4 Exercise the same precautions in loading, unloading, and clearing weapons during blank
ammunition firing, as when firing live ammunition.
4.4.5 Troops will not use blank ammunition during hand-to-hand training.
4.4.6 Blank ammunition cannot be fired in the Cantonment Area without approval from the Camp
Ripley Chief of Security, Phone # (320) 616-3087/3088.
4.4.7 Blank Firing Attachments (BFA) (blank adapters) will be attached to all weapon systems that have
approved BFA manufactured for them. Weapons will not be fired without the proper BFA.
a) A five (5) meter Safe Separation Distance (SSD) must be observed at all times.
b) DANGER – Do not fire small arms blank ammunition (5.56 mm and 7.62 mm) within 5
meters of personnel. A distance of 20 meters should be maintained from personnel while firing
.50 cal. machine gun blank ammunition.
4.4.8 A dispersion angle of 10 degrees on either side of the Gun Target Line (GTL) should also be
observed.
4.4.9 BDUs/ACUs should be worn at all times. Eye protection should be worn by the firer.
4.4.10 A violation of the SSD could result in serious injury. If the SSD is decreased to within 0.9 meters,
fatal injury may occur.
4.4.11 Live and blank ammunition will not be stored together or issued simultaneously from the same
ammo point to individual troops or crews of combat or combat support vehicles prior to the initiation of a
force-on-force training exercise.
4.4.12 Prior to initiating force-on-force training, commanders will ensure that there is no live ammunition
on board vehicles or in possession of troops. A reasonable period of time shall be allocated to ensure that
no live ammunition remains with soldiers preparing to receive blank munitions for field training.
4.4.13 Weapons that are firing blank ammunition must have the blank firing adapter affixed to the
weapon. This provides clear notice that blanks are in use, and prevents possible projection of particles
directly at a soldier during training operations.
4.5 MACHINE GUNS
4.5.1 Load the weapon only when ready to fire.
4.5.2 Keep the finger outside the trigger guard until ready to fire.
4.5.3 If the weapon continues to fire after the trigger is released (Runaway Gun), keep the weapon
pointed down range.
4.5.4 Put machine gun covers in the raised position except while firing.
4.5.5 All personnel firing .50 caliber machine guns must be properly trained on head space and
timing procedures.
22
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
4.5.6 Machine guns are “loaded” whenever a belt or magazine remains inserted in the weapon.
4.6 UNESTABLISHED RANGES: Units requesting a training area to conduct a Live Fire Exercise (LFX)
must have a detailed Risk Management Plan presented to the RCO NLT 90 days in advance of the
exercise. (See Chapter 17 for additional requirements for Live Fire Exercises)
4.7 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
4.7.1 Automated Ranges
a) In addition to requirements of this regulation, units are also required to fulfill requirements of the
specific range SOPs. The SOPs are located in the Range Packets, or can be requested through Range
Control.
b) Changes to automated range scenarios must be requested NLT 72 hours prior to firing.
c) Assistant RSOs will be assigned as directed in the range SOP.
d) Night firing will be altered to allow only the 25m or 50m qualification. Units will not be allowed to
change firing distances during periods of darkness, unless they can provide the RCO with a detailed
safety operations plan that insures the safety of all personnel involved with night firing.
4.7.2 M16-/M4-Series Ranges
a) Reference pages 6-10 of FM 3-22.9 for uniform item requirements during weapon qualification
firing.
b) Kevlar helmets and body armor are required in the “Pits” area of the A-1 range while the range is
firing.
c) Automatic rifles are considered loaded when a magazine is in the receiver.
4.7.3 Clearing Barrel Usage: Per the PS Magazine Number 632, dated JUL 2005, Clearing Rods are
not to be used for clearing M16/M4 series weapons. Reference the Weapons Handling Procedures
Handout for complete weapon clearing instructions. The Handout is available at Range Control.
4.7.4 NOTE: Rifle bolts will remain open and locked to the rear, except during firing.
4.7.5 NOTE: If personnel move from one firing position to another, they may carry the weapon
with the muzzle pointed down range, or they may carry the weapon in the “Low Ready” position
with the muzzle directed down range.
4.8 REFERENCES
4.8.1 FM 3-22.9 Rifle Marksmanship M16-/M4-Series Weapons, dated AUG 2008
4.8.2 FM 3-22.65-Browning Machine Gun, Caliber .50 HB, M2 w/Change 1
4.8.3 FM 3-22.68-Crew-Served Machine Guns M249/M240B
4.8.4 FM 3-23.35-Combat Training with Pistols M9 and M11 w/Changes 1-4
4.8.5 FM 23-10
4.8.6 TC-7-9 Infantry Live-Fire Training
23
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 5 Grenades and Grenade Launchers
5.1 HAND GRENADES
5.1.1 High explosive loaded type grenades. These contain explosive charges that detonate after a short
delay (3 to 5 seconds). Every precaution will be taken to prevent injury from flying fragments. For
training purposes, fragmentation and offensive hand grenades will be thrown from a trench or barrier
equivalent to a screen of sandbags 0.5 meter thick.
5.1.2 Firing conditions for fragmentation and offensive grenades
a) Personnel within the 150-meter danger area when casualty producing hand grenades are thrown
will wear ACH or Kevlar helmets, IBA with SAPPI Plates, single hearing protection, and proper eye
protection.
b) Safety clips on fragmentation and practice grenades will not be removed until immediately before
the safety pin is removed. The grenade must be thrown. No attempt will be made to re-insert the safety
pin.
c) All personnel must be proficient in the safety precautions for handling and throwing grenades
before live grenade training begins. Soldiers MUST qualify on A-10 Hand Grenade Qualification
Course, and COMPLETE practice grenade training in a Mock Bay (on L/HGR Range) prior to live
grenade training on the HGR.
d) OICs, RSOs, and live-bay ARSOs for live grenade training events must be certified to perform
these duties. Certification will include training detailing actions in the event of a dropped grenade, short
throw, grenade thrown other than downrange, SDZ, control of observers, misfire/dud grenade
procedures, arming, throwing techniques, and pre-live bay requirements. RSOs and ARSOs must be
qualified with the hand grenade prior to assuming their duties.
e) Dud high explosive grenades will not be approached by anyone other than EOD personnel.
Adjacent throwing bays to the one with the dud will be closed until EOD personnel clear the dud.
f) Personnel will not leave protected cover for 30 minutes after a Hand Grenade malfunction.
g) Live grenades will not be thrown into standing water, deep snow, or dense vegetation.
h) Range OICs and RSOs are cautioned that multiple employments of grenades in a training
scenario significantly increase the difficulty of determining the actual number of grenades that detonated.
Subsequent training scenarios, generating an unplanned detonation, may activate dud grenades.
5.1.3 Prior to using the practice hand grenade, Baseball G811, the OIC will:
a) Inspect the body for cracks.
b) Inspect for foreign material in grenade body and in the fuze opening threads.
c) Insure that the porthole in the base is not blocked.
d) Insert a new fuze, preparing the grenade for reuse.
5.2 HAND GRENADE RANGE (HGR) (LIVE GRENADE FAMILIARIZATION): The Hand Grenade Range
offers the individual soldier the opportunity to meet the new STRAC requirement to throw live hand
grenades. Reference FM 3-23.30 and the Live Hand Grenade Course SOP for additional information on
Hand Grenades.
5.2.1 NOTE: Units MUST coordinate the use of HE Grenades with Range Control NLT 90 days in
advance. Range Control must give EOD a warning of scheduled range dates.
5.2.2 All safety measures and precautions will be followed.
5.2.3 Range personnel requirements are as follows:
a) OIC (E-7 and above)
b) RSO (E-6 and above)
c) ARSO-Live-Bay NCO (Corporal and above)
d) Gate Guard-2
e) Medic
f) Range NCOIC
5.2.4 A range specific safety briefing will be given to all personnel prior to range operations.
5.2.5 The Range OIC must ensure that communications between himself and the gate guard is
maintained at all times.
5.2.6 Range personnel cannot exceed noise exposure of more than 1000 grenades per day.
5.2.7 All personnel will know the Hand Grenade Status levels:
a) SAFE: a grenade with all of the safety devices intact.
24
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
b) LIVE: a thrown hand grenade from the instant it leaves the throwers hand until the expected fuze
time has elapsed.
c) DUD: a thrown grenade that failed to detonate after the expected fuze time has elapsed.
5.2.8 Units may also consider scheduling the A-10 Hand Grenade Qualification Course to raise soldier
confidence levels prior to utilizing this range.
5.3 GRENADE LAUNCHERS AND GRENADE MACHINE GUNS: Personnel will be instructed in the
proper use of grenade launchers and grenade machine guns, and applicable safety precautions before
firing live ammunition.
5.3.1 All duds will be reported to Range Control.
5.3.2 M203/M320 Grenade Launchers
a) A-9 is the Grenade Launcher Qualification Range.
b) HE M320 40mm is authorized for firing into Hendrickson or Leach Impact Areas only.
c) Illumination rounds fired from the M320/M320 will be treated the same as hand held signals, and
may be utilized where they are permitted.
d) Hazardous fragmentation from HE grenade ammunition may be experienced to 165-meters from
the point of detonation.
e) OICs and RSOs must ensure that only low-velocity grenade cartridges are being fired.
f) Single hearing protection will be worn within 2 meters of the grenade launchers. A Kevlar Helmet
and flak jacket will be worn while firing HE M320/M320 40mm grenades.
5.3.3 Grenade Machine Guns (MK19)
a) J, K, and MK-19 Ranges are approved for 40mm TP rounds only. Other firing points may be
requested through Range Control NLT 90 days in advance.
b) OP-7 and OP-23 are the only authorized ranges for MK-19 40mm HE rounds.
c) Targets will be engaged only at ranges greater than 75 meters with TP ammunition.
d) Targets will be engaged only at ranges greater than 310 meters with HE ammunition.
e) Firing through obstructions is prohibited.
f) Body Armor, eye and ear protection, and Kevlar helmet must be worn at all times. Approved
hearing protection is required for all personnel within the noise hazard contour of 20-meter radius around
the weapon system.
g) Firing over open hatches is not authorized.
5.3.4 Restrictions for static vehicle mounted MK19:
a) A gunner’s quadrant and/or MK64, MOD 7, mount depression stop will be used to keep the
minimum elevation above 30 mils when firing.
b) For M998 vehicles-Soft top must be covering the driver and passenger.
c) For M113 and M106 vehicle-Driver’s hatch must be closed when firing over the left side, forward,
or right side of the vehicle, or when personnel or objects in hatch areas are forward of the weapon
muzzle.
5.3.5 Restrictions for moving vehicle mounted MK19, per DA Pamphlet 385-63:To preclude
unintentional impacts of HE and HEDP ammunition at ranges less than 310 meters:
a) Restrict speeds to not greater than 16 kph/10 mph when firing from the HMMWV M1025/1026
armament carrier, M998T interim squad carrier, and the M1114 over paved and improved roads in good
condition, and not greater than 8 kph/5 mph over rough roads, trails, and cross-country.
5.3.6 Restrict speeds to not greater than 16 kph/10 mph when firing from the M113 and M106
personnel carriers on any kind of terrain.
5.4 REFERENCES
5.4.1 FM 3-22.27-MK19 40mm Grenade Machine Gun MOD 3 w/Change 1
5.4.2 FM 3-22.31-M320 40mm Grenade Launcher w/ Change 1
5.4.3 TM 3-22.31 (FM 3-22.31) 40mm Grenade Launchers November 2010 w/Change 1
5.4.4 FM 3-23.30-Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals w/Change 1
25
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 6 Antitank Rockets
6.1 FIRING CONDITIONS
6.1.1 The following ranges are authorized for firing antitank rockets:
a) J - Practice and HEAT
b) K - Practice and HEAT
6.1.2 Personnel will not stand or have any portion of the body directly in front of or behind a loaded
rocket launcher.
6.1.3 Before firing, the SDZ to the rear of the launcher (100m Backblast Area) will be cleared of
personnel, materiel (including expended cartridge cases), and readily combustible vegetation.
6.1.4 Cover ammunition stored on rocket ranges. Store ammunition to the flank of firing positions, and
out of the direct rays of the sun.
6.1.5 Do not fire ammunition during temperatures other than those prescribed on the round.
6.1.6 AT-4s will not be fired from within a building, or within 50 meters of a vertical or nearly vertical
backstop, barrier, or obstacle, because of the risk of debris ricochets.
6.1.7 Personnel within 390 meters of the weapon will wear approved single hearing protection.
6.1.8 Prone or foxhole firing of HE AT-4 (M136) is not authorized. In training, an individual may fire one
round from the sitting position, or three rounds from the standing or kneeling positions in a 24-hour
period.
6.1.9 The firing of antitank rockets over unprotected troops from a moving vehicle or aircraft is not
authorized.
6.1.10 Units must ensure that they have received a copy of AIN 55-06 from the ASP prior to going
down range.
6.1.11 Follow all procedures and precautions in the applicable FMs and TMs during pre-fire checks and
firing operations.
6.1.12 NOTE: Per FM 3-23.25, Appendix A, para. A-3, page A-2, when operating temperatures fall
below freezing (0 deg Celsius/32 deg Fahrenheit) the dimensions of all Backblast areas and Safety
Zones will be doubled.
6.1.13 NOTE: Per FM 3-23.25, Appendix A, para. A-12, Table A-2, page A-5, within a 24-hour
period, a Soldier may only fire, observe fire, or act as a Safety NCO for the M1316 AT-4 one to
three times, depending on the firing position. Three times total if the M136 is fired from either the
standing or kneeling positions. One time total if the M136 is fired from the sitting position.
6.2 REFERENCES
6.2.1 FM 3-23.25-Light Anti-Armor Weapons
6.2.2 FM 3-06.11 Combined Arms Operations in Urban Terrain
6.2.3 TM 9-1315-886-12 – AT-4
6.2.4 TM 9-1340-203-20 – LAW
26
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 7 Antitank Guided Missiles
7.1 TOW MISSILES
7.1.1 Firing conditions - General
a) The TOW missile (inert round) can be fired on K, Center, and East Ranges.
b) Before firing any TOW missile, the entire SDZ will be cleared of all non-mission essential
personnel.
c) TOW missile firings must be accomplished within predetermined boundaries. The RCO will ensure
that an adequate SDZ exists.
d) Procedures and precautions in FMs and TMs will be observed in all preparation and firing
operations.
e) Only those personnel actively engaged in firing and controlling the Ground Mounted TOW missile
system will be at the launch point, with protective body armor, Kevlar helmet, eye, and hearing protection.
f) Personnel at launch point will not stand, nor permit any part of their body to be, directly behind or in
front of the launcher while missile is in the launch tube.
g) TOW missiles will not be fired from within buildings or within 100 meters of any vertical or nearly
vertical backstop.
h) The range will be inspected after TOW firing activities to ensure, to the maximum extent possible
that all guidance wires are removed from the range. Aircraft will not be used to remove guidance wire.
i) Occupation of Area I, the area directly in front of the weapon, is prohibited.
j) All missiles will be tested using the missile test set as part of the overall system pre-fire checks.
This will identify the majority of missiles with a potential for operational failures.
7.1.2 Surface Danger Zone
a) Area F danger area to the rear of the launcher is 100 meters.
b) At least single hearing protection will be worn by all personnel within the rectangle 100 meters to
either side and 200 meters to the rear of the TOW.
c) OIC and RSO will ensure no personnel or equipment are located within this area.
d) Misfires and malfunctions will be handled IAW appropriate TMs.
e) MILES training:
1) The TOW missile uses the antitank weapons effect signature simulator (ATWESS) device for a
noise simulator.
2) ATWESS devices must never be armed until ready to fire. A sever jolt to the ATWESS may
cause the device to function.
3) Approved single hearing protection is required.
7.2 DRAGON
7.2.1 Firing Conditions
a) Dragon firing is only authorized on K Range.
b) The entire SDZ will be cleared of all non-mission essential personnel.
c) Only those personnel actively engaged in firing and control of Dragon guided missile as specified
by the appropriate FMs and TMs will be permitted in the SDZ at the time of firing. Non-operational
personnel will move to a distance of at least 50 meters to the side of the launcher (110 meters when firing
M222 HEAT rounds).
d) The gunner and all personnel at launch point will wear protective body armor, Kevlar helmet, eye
protection, and single hearing protection.
e) At least single hearing protection will be worn by all personnel within the rectangle 170 meters to
either side, and 260 meters to the rear of the Dragon firing point.
f) Dragon guided missiles will be fired according to the procedure and precautions outlined in
appropriate FM's and TM's.
7.2.2 Surface Danger Zone
a) Area F to the rear of the launcher is 50 meters.
b) OIC and RSO will ensure no personnel or equipment are located in this area.
c) Personnel will not stand or permit any portion of their body to be directly behind or in front of the
launcher when the tracker and missile are mated.
d) The Dragon will not be fired from within buildings, unless fired IAW FM 90-10-1, or within 50
meters of a vertical or nearly vertical backstop.
e) MILES training
1) The Dragon missile uses the ATWESS device for a noise simulator.
27
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
2) ATWESS devices must never be armed until ready to fire. A severe jolt to the ATWESS may
cause the device to function. Approved single hearing protection is required.
7.3 JAVELIN: The Javelin is a shoulder-launched, man-portable, anti-armor weapon system. It fires a
passive imaging infrared missile with a lock-on before launch guidance system.
7.3.1 Firing conditions
a) Before firing any Javelin missile, the entire SDZ will be cleared of non-mission essential personnel.
Only those personnel specified in the appropriate FMs and TMs will be permitted in the SDZ.
b) Javelin missile firing will be accomplished within predetermined boundaries. The RCO will ensure
that an adequate SDZ exits.
c) See applicable FMs and TMs for preparation and firing operations, and Misfire procedures.
7.3.2 Personnel will neither stand nor permit any part of their body to be directly behind or in front of the
Javelin launcher.
7.3.3 Surface Danger Zone
Personnel located in the 100-meter primary danger zone to the rear of the launcher must wear approved
hearing and eye protection.
7.4 REFERENCES
7.4.1 FM 3-22.34
7.4.2 FM 3-22.37
7.4.3 FM 3-22.1
7.4.4 TM 9-2350-252-10-2
7.4.5 TM 9-1425-484-10
28
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 8 Tank/Fighting Vehicle Gunnery
8.1 GENERAL
8.1.1 The only ranges authorized for Tank and BFV main gun firing are as follows:
a) East Range: Automated/computer scored, Table XII capable.
b) North Range: Scaled BFV range. Sub-caliber only Tank range (stationary BP’s only).
8.1.2 Scenarios must be submitted to Range Control NLT 90 days in advance. See Target Matrix in
TAB J.
8.1.3 Request for Tank and BFV scenario changes on above ranges must be submitted NLT 72 hours
in advance.
8.1.4 Simulation firing can be accomplished on the SCALED RANGE (located in TA05 south of Ferrell
Lake). This range has a maximum target distance of 1000 meters. It will support Tank/Bradley Tables I
through V with TWGSS and MILES.
a) The range will be reserved through the Operations Office.
b) Send Target Matrix requests to Automated Target Systems. This range is remote control operated.
c) Units will hand receipt the remote control from ATS.
8.2 TANK/BFV FIRING CONDITIONS
8.2.1 Tank/BFV cannon will not be fired above 5 degrees QE. The following procedures will be
employed:
a) Unit master gunners, in conjunction with Range Control personnel, will ensure that targets are
placed at or less than 5 degrees elevation. Tank/BFV Commanders will ensure that all weapon systems
in a firing condition are pointed toward the impact area at or less than 5 degrees elevation.
b) Non-stabilized tank armament will not be fired while the tank is moving.
8.2.2 Misfires and malfunctions will be handled according to the appropriate TMs for tanks and BFVs.
8.2.3 The OIC and RSO will ensure a range safety briefing is given to crews and range support staff
prior to live-fire operations. The Briefing will include the following items:
a) Day and Night firing scenarios
b) Right and Left Limits of the range
c) Misfire Procedures
d) Vehicle flag/light procedures
e) Weapon system(s) pointed up and down range when the vehicle accesses the range
f) Communications between the firing Tank/BFV and the Tower must be maintained at all times
g) The RSO will ensure that the weapon systems are cleared, and on “safe”, before leaving the range
8.2.4 When lasers are in use on a range, the OIC will ensure that:
a) All personnel are thoroughly briefed on safety precautions.
b) Lasers are kept "off" at all times, unless the vehicle has received permission to load weapons.
c) To prevent accidental firing of the laser, the ballistic doors will be closed when the laser is not in
use.
d) Ballistic doors will be closed before moving the vehicle to the rear of the bore sighting line, or into
the parking area.
e) The use of LRFs equipped with eye safe filters over the emission port is authorized in all Training
Areas.
f) Additional information on lasers is found in Chapter 16.
8.2.5 A red range flag must be displayed at the entrance to the range during day fire and a red blinking
light during night fire.
8.2.6 The Fuel Point and the Ammunition Transfer Point must be separated by a minimum of 300
meters.
8.2.7 Environmental containment materials (spill kits) will be available on all mounted ranges and
during refueling operations.
8.3 M250/257 SMOKE GRENADE LAUNCHERS
8.3.1 Firing conditions
a) SDZ occupation by unprotected personnel in the open is prohibited.
b) Grenades will not be fired into strong winds.
c) Personal protective equipment will be worn by personnel within the SDZ.
d) Clothing will fit snugly to prevent red phosphorous fragments from getting inside ACU/BDUs,
particularly around the neck, ends of sleeves, and pockets.
8.3.2 Personnel are prohibited from occupying the following hazard areas:
29
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
a) 125 meters in front and to the sides of the vehicle.
b) 50 meters to the rear of the vehicle.
8.4 WEAPONS EFFECT SIGNATURE SIMULATOR (HOFFMAN DEVICE): Personnel within 25 meters
of the Hoffman Device will wear approved single hearing protection. Eye protection will also be worn.
8.5 HAZARDOUS IMPULSE NOISE EXPOSURE
8.5.1 The driver’s hatch is closed at all times during any vehicle operation or weapon system firing of
any kind.
8.5.2 Only personnel wearing approved single hearing protection will be allowed within 200 meters of a
tank during main gun firings.
8.5.3 Non-mission essential personnel will be restricted from areas 10 meters to the sides and from all
areas forward of firing vehicles.
8.6 FIRING VEHICLE STATUS DESIGNATIONS
8.6.1 During daylight and good visibility, flags or lights will be displayed on firing vehicles. At night and
during reduced visibility, lights will be displayed.
8.6.2 Once a firing vehicle begins a battle run and passes the start fire line, all weapon systems are
considered to be loaded and ready to fire.
8.6.3 When the firing vehicle completes a battle run, the vehicle commander will ensure that the
weapon systems have been cleared, and that the proper flags, or lights, are displayed.
8.6.4 Vehicle commanders will ensure that the weapon systems are aligned within the envelope of the
vehicle’s width before leaving the range.
8.7 CLOSE SUPPORT OF GROUND PERSONNEL IN LIVE-FIRE EXERCISES
8.7.1 Firing overhead of unprotected personnel by tanks, Bradley fighting vehicles, and the CEV main
gun is prohibited.
8.7.2 Tank, Bradley, M551, and CEV main guns may be used to provide flanking fire if unprotected
personnel remain out of the SD
8.8 AUTOMATED TOWER RADIO FREQUENCIES
8.8.1 NOTE: Per FM 3-20.21 HBCT Gunnery, Jump Radio communications are only required while
performing Gunnery Qualification Tables. The Jump Frequency is utilized by the Crew Evaluators to
ensure that proper commands are given, and proper crew procedures are being followed. Jump Radio
usage during any other type of armor live fire is NOT required.
8.8.2 Refer to MILLER COMPLEX in TAB A for East, Center, and West Range Radio Frequencies.
8.8.3 Scaled Range Radio Frequencies to be used while utilizing the range:
Scaled Range
1
Admin Frequency
2
Firing Frequency
3
Jump Frequency
40.025
32.050
41.550
8.9 REFERENCES: FM 3-20.21
30
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 9 Mortars
9.1 FIRING CONDITIONS
9.1.1 WARNING- Firing mortars over the heads of unprotected troops by Marine Corps units is
not authorized. Firing mortars over the heads of unprotected troops by Army units is not
recommended. Mortar ammunition must be certified for overhead fire of unprotected troops. The
installation commander may approve firing over the heads of unprotected troops with certified
overhead fire mortar ammunition on the basis of acceptable level of risk. Procedural controls to
prevent human error (for example, dedicated observer-controllers with the unprotected troops and
firing mortars with dedicated communications) will be included in the risk management process.
9.1.2 NLT 90 days prior, units must schedule the Training Area that their stationary Firing
Point(s) [FP(s)] and/or Hip-Shoot missions will be located in, and the Impact Area they will be
firing into. This will give Range Control the time to draw, verify, and approve the Surface Danger
Zones (SDZs) for the requested Firing Points (FPs). Information necessary for Range Control to
produce SDZ’s for Mortar units – TFT’s for your weapon system, Mortar size and Ammo to be fired
from the firing point.
a) All Mortar firing positions will be located near the boundary of an Impact Area.
b) Practice ammunition, including SRTR, is never fired over the heads of troops, per FM 322.90, Appendix B, Safety, page B-13.
c) If Mortars are firing as part of a CALFEX or LFX, the SDZ must not encroach on the position(s) of
unprotected troops, regardless of what type of ammunition is being fired.
9.1.3 All Mortar rounds fired must fall within the Impact Area, and must be observed.
9.1.4 When conducting indirect fire missions, the OP must be in the “Open” status with Range Control
before the firing position will be allowed to “Open”.
9.1.5 The Mortar Fire Direction Center (FDC) will have the firing position(s) safety limits entered on a
Safety Diagram, Safety “T”, and on a plotting board map or whiz wheel or on the computer showing the
mortar sections impact box and mortar position. The rounds will be plotted as they are called in by the
FO’s, so that the FDC can insure that the target grid is in the impact area and follow up rounds are
tracked to ensure each round lands in the Impact Area.
9.1.6 Refer to FM 3-22.90, Chapter 1, Section III for additional Mortar Safety Procedures.
9.1.7 Use the following guidelines when firing mortars:
a) All Mortars must be within the base mortar and within 100 meters of the surveyed firing point grid.
Reference FM 3-22.90, page 1-6, paragraph 1-31.
b) Any projectile that bursts or lands outside the safety limits, as prescribed by RC Form 16B and the
RMTK created SDZ, or any unobserved rounds, will require immediate action and investigation as
outlined below, to determine the cause.
1) Cease-Fire-Freeze the Firing Point IMMEDIATELY.
2) Immediately report the incident to Range Control using the Range Accident/Incident Checklist
(see TAB C).
3) Immediately Cease Fire all units, until the responsible unit is identified.
4) Do not change any settings on, or modify the position of, the mortar until Range Control has
completed the investigation.
5) Mortar ammunition stored at mortar positions will not exceed two firing orders (8 rounds).
6) Propellant increments removed from the rounds before firing will be placed in a metal or wood
container located outside the firing vehicle, or 25 meters away from a dismounted Mortar.
7) Replace all safety wires and increments on rounds not used.
8) All personnel who take part in mortar firing will wear a Kevlar helmet and single hearing
protection. If firing the 120 mm Mortar from a carrier, double hearing protection must be worn. Personnel
outside the carrier, within 200 meters, will wear single hearing protection.
9) Use Every mortar tube will have some form of visible safety stakes or marks/markers to indicate
the right and left limits of fire, exception to the rule is the new mounted 120mm Mortars with the mounted
GPS computer tracking system, which tracks and verifies safety limits with its internal system.
10) To prevent accidental functioning of the point detonating elements of fuzes of the M524 series,
the fuzes must not be dropped, rolled, or struck under any circumstances.
31
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
9.1.8 Excess increments will be burned as soon as possible, and will not be transported from one firing
position to another.
a) Increments will be arranged IAW appropriate FM and TC for burning.
b) When burning excess increments, all personnel, vehicles, or weapons shall maintain a minimum
distance of 200 meters from the burning area, and a minimum of 1,200 meters from Camp Ripley
boundaries.
c) The size of the burning team will be sufficient to serve as road guards, arrange increments, and
fight fires that may start.
d) The team will carry a sufficient quantity of water (10 gallons minimum) and shovels.
e) All compasses and aiming circles must be declineated for the north or south impact areas, dated,
initialed, and correction factors.
9.1.9 WARNING - Do not transport rounds without safety pins installed.
9.2 MORTAR FIRE CONTROL SYSTEM (MFCS) GUNNERY
9.2.1 Before firing, the PLT SGT/LDR will verify with a PLGR the position and direction of fire for each
Mortar, every time they enter a new firing position.
9.2.2 In the event of computer failure, place FP in CHECKFIRE, and then notify the FDC and Range
Control immediately. Begin degraded-mode gunnery procedures.
9.2.3 Follow all firing procedures outlined in FM 3-22.90, FM 3-22.91, and TM 9-1220-248-10.
9.2.4 These manuals must be on site for referencing during all types of mortar firing:
a) AR 385-63 or DA PAM 385-63
b) TM 43-0001-28(or the relevant data sheets from the TM for the ammo being used on the site)
c) FM 3-22.90 Mortars
d) TFT for all Mortar types on site
e) TC for FDC Computer system
f) TM for weapon system
g) Signed Composite Risk Assessment
9.3 HIP-SHOOT FIRE MISSIONS
9.3.1 Units will submit a Hip-Shoot Mission OPLAN and Risk Management Worksheet NLT 90 days
prior to Range Control for review and approval.
9.3.2 Hip-Shoot missions will be conducted along the Impact Area Boundary roads only.
9.3.3 Reference FM 7-90, Appendix F Hip-Shoot Missions, page F-3 for further details.
9.4 SURFACE DANGER ZONES:
9.4.1 The Mortar firing position will give the following information in the RC Form 16B-Mortar
Range Opening/Closing Checklist to Range Control:
a) Training Area and Firing Position Grid Coordinates (8-digit minimum)
b) Maximum Left Azimuth
c) Maximum Right Azimuth
d) Maximum Range
e) Minimum Range
f) DDZ being used (include) – date on SDZ, weapon type, ammo type, fuzes, charge/charges, and
authorizing signature.
9.4.2 The Fire Desk Operator then calls Miller Army Airfield to request the opening of an Air Advisory
Block.
9.4.3 When all safety criteria are met, the Fire Desk Operator will “Open” the Mortar position.
9.5 REFERENCES
9.5.1 FM 3-22.90
9.5.2 FM 3-22.91
9.5.3 FM 7-90
9.5.4 TM 43-0001-28
9.5.5 TM 9-1220-248-10
9.5.6 OP (OBSERVATION POINTS – CHAPTER 1, 1.15.7)
9.5.7 DECLINATION STATIONS (TAB K, RC TABLE DECLINATIONS)
32
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 10 Artillery
10.1 FIRING CONDITIONGS – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
10.1.1 An accurate arillery survey system will be used at all firing points for grid location/laying of firing
systems and a different survey system for checking/verification of the Artillery system, i.e., GLPS, PADS,
DAGR, Aiming Circles, etc., prior to firing FM 3-09.8 Chapter 2 Safety.
10.1.2 The M67 GLPS can still be used in conjunction with the M2A2 Aiming Circle and the Positioning
and Azimuth Determining System (PADS).
10.1.3 Camp Ripley has various locations with large deposits of minerals that affect the use of
magnetic direction-finding equipment.
10.1.4 Due to the size of the Camp Ripley impact areas and SDZ requirements for the ammunition,
Rocket Assisted Projectiles (RAP) cannot be fired on this installation.
10.1.5 WARNING – Large base fragments weighing 2-3 pounds can travel back up-range as far
as 2400 meters from the point of impact to the firing position. This risk is applicable to all M107
rounds. Commanders may adjust surface danger zones and/or location of observers to
compensate for the possibility of incoming base fragments, or ensure that observers are in
protective cover during fire missions. (Reference AIN 118-05, dated 13 OCT 2005, for further
information) Compound B type HE M107 rounds are not impacted
10.1.6 NOTE: Range Control has the list of surveyed safety points (ORSTA to EOL) that are
available to validate magnetic direction with survey.
10.1.7 NOTE: Firing will cease when visibility is less than 1/2 mile, unless radar is available.
10.2 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
10.2.1 The Camp Ripley Post Commander has approved the use of E-7s as OIC.
10.2.2 The minimum QE for 105mm and 155mm indirect fire is 267 mils.
10.2.3 All Artillery rounds fired must be observed.
10.2.4 Any projectile that bursts or lands outside safety limits, or any unobserved rounds, will require
immediate action and investigation, as outlined below to determine the cause.
a) Immediately, report the incident to Range Control using the Range Incident Checklist
(see TAB C).
b) Immediately, suspend firing of all FA units until the responsible unit is identified.
10.2.5 Continuous communication must be maintained with Range Control on SINCGARS primary
frequency 36.100, or alternate frequency 36.900.
10.2.6 The OP must be in the “Open” status with Range Control, before the firing position will be given
an “Open” status.
10.2.7 All projectiles fired during training will be fuzed with bore-safe fuzes. Firing projectiles without
fuzes is strictly prohibited.
10.2.8 Locate all weapons within a 200-meter radius of the firing point grid.
10.2.9 Place safety stakes, tape, or physical constraints/marks on all towed cannon weapons to insure
safety computer system for tracking rounds during firing missions.
10.2.10 The boundary of the Impact Area will be drawn on the FDC firing chart or have it on your FDC
computer system for tracking rounds during firing missions.
10.2.11 The following manuals (hard copy) must be present, and their usage understood, by the OIC
and RSO at the battery location:
a) FM 6-50
b) FM 6-40/MCWP 3-1.6.19
c) TC/TM for FDC computer system
d) FM 3-09.8
e) TM for the weapon system
f) DA PAM 385-63 or AR 385-63/MCO P3570.1B
g) TM 43-0001-28 or at a minimum the pages covering the ammo on the firing point
h) TM for weapon system
10.2.12 Overhead firing - The OIC of a firing point or range must insure proper precautions when firing
any fuzes during inclement weather (see TM 43-0001-28)
10.2.13 Powder burning
33
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
a) Units will burn excess powder increments prior to moving to a new firing position.
b) An E-7 or above will supervise the burning of excess powder.
c) When burning excess powder bags, all personnel, vehicles, or weapons shall maintain a minimum
distance of 200 meters from the burning area, and a minimum of 1,200 meters from Camp Ripley
boundaries.
d) Powder will be arranged IAW appropriate FM and TC for burning.
e) The size of the powder burning team will be sufficient to serve as road guards, arrange powder bags,
and fight fires that may start. The team will carry a minimum of 10 gallons of water, and shovels as
necessary.
10.3 FIELD ARTILLERY CANNON SURFACE DANGER ZONE
10.3.1 Road guards, with communications to the FDC, will be posted on all major roads passing
through area E of the firing battery. Area E for Camp Ripley is as follows: 300 m for 105mm, 350 m for
155mm.
10.3.2 Batteries are responsible for ensuring safety requirements regarding Area E are complied with.
10.3.3 Artillery firing positions will be occupied and opened with Range Control utilizing the following
procedures:
a) Firing Battery advance party personnel will do normal procedures to place weapon systems in
locations to support the mission.
b) The BC or Gunnery Sergeant will use an accurate system to locate an 8 digit grid to be used as
the center of battery grid to insure all guns will be positioned with 200 meters of this point.
c) The BC or Gunnery Sergeant will then contact Range Control to submit the FP Grid and the
designated Impact Area. This should be done ASAP, to give Range Control the time to compute SDZ
data.
10.4 NON-ESTABLISHED FIRING POINT PROGRAM
10.4.1 This program allows artillery units to occupy any location within a designated training area
without regard to established firing points. The program is designed to exercise the command and control
elements within artillery units. This increases realism to exercise the command and control elements
within artillery units and by providing maximum availability of tactical firing points with out loss of safety.
10.4.2 Artillery units will coordinate use with affected maneuver units prior to occupation of firing
points. Maneuver and artillery units, prior to AT or IDT periods, will agree upon terrain utilization. The
unit will coordinate with Range Control NLT 72 hours in advance for the training area and time period,
for the execution of the program.
10.4.3 Hendrickson Impact Non-Established (HINE)
a) Training Areas authorized for use with the HINE program are: 1(west of grid line 9330), 2(north of
grid line 06),4 and 5(east of the 9020 grid line, with the left limit no less then 6376 mil in azimuth); 8, 9,
10(west of grid line 9330), 15, 17 thru 25, 29 thru 33, 35, 37 thru 45, 48, 50 thru 55, 68 thru 71, and 79,
south of grid line 30.
b) Each firing position will have a firing chart or map with the HINE target area plotted. Boundaries
for the HINE program are from grid UM 89981689, draw a circle with a radius of 1000 meters. All
tabulated safety data will remain in this designated circle. For the maximum illumination canister to
impact range draw a circle with a radius of 1400 meters from grid UM 89981689. All illumination canisters
must fall within this designated range.
c) NO MACS Charge 4H allowed. When firing MACS Charge 3 High Angle missions, units MUST
stay BELOW 26,000 feet Maximum Airspace Restriction. The unit must secure and ensure that no
personnel are within Area E (350 meters for 155mm and 300 meters for 105mm) by use of barriers or
blocking off roads and trails with vehicles. If manning of these barriers is required, guard must have
commo with firing battery.
d) OP-1, OP-2, and OP-7 are the Observation Posts for the HINE Program.
10.4.4 Leach Impact Non-Established (LINE)
a) Training Areas authorized for use with the LINE Program are 18 thru 23, 36 Lake Alott area only,
40 thru 45, 49, 50, 54 thru 59, 61 thru 64, 68 thru 71, and 79 (below grid line 30.
b) Each firing position will have a firing chart or map with the LINE target area plotted. Boundaries
for the LINE program are from grid UM 92282527, draw a circle with a radius of 760 meters. All tabulated
safety data must remain in the designated circle. For maximum illumination to canister impact range draw
a circle with a radius of 1400 meters from grid UM 92282527. All illumination canisters must fall within
this designated range.
c) NO MACS Charge 4H allowed. When firing MACS Charge 3 High Angle missions, units MUST
stay BELOW 26,000 feet Maximum Airspace Restriction. The unit must secure and ensure that no
34
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
personnel are within Area E (350 meters for 155mm and 300 meters for 105mm) by use of barriers or
blocking off roads and trails with vehicles. If manning of these barriers is required, guard must have
commo with firing battery
d) OP-15, OP-16, OP-19, and OP-23 are the Observation Posts for the LINE Program.
10.4.5 All tabulated safety data will remain in the designated safety box.
10.4.6 All weapons will be located within a 200 meter radius of the firing point grid.
10.4.7 Batteries will be cleared to fire after they have verified their safety data with the battalion FDC,
and transmitted their opening data, using the Range Opening/Closing Checklist to Range Control.
10.4.8 Continuous Communication is maintained with Range Control on primary frequency FM 36.100,
or alternate frequency FM 36.900.
10.4.9 Batteries are responsible for ensuring safety requirements regarding Area E are complied with,
per paragraph 10.3.
10.4.10 For more information concerning the HINE and LINE programs contact Range Control at (320)
616-3137/3134.
10.5 DIRECT FIRE SAFETY
10.5.1 Field Artillery may be fired in the direct mode from the J Range, into Hendrickson Impact Area
only. Maximum Charge is 3G or 1L.
10.5.2 Minimum target engagements are as follows:
a) 105mm - 1100 meters
b) 155mm - 1100 meters
10.5.3 Any projectile that bursts or lands outside safety limits, or any unobserved rounds, will require
immediate action and investigation, as outlined below to determine the cause.
a) Immediately, report the incident to Range Control using the Range Incident Checklist
(see TAB C).
b) Immediately, suspend firing of all FA units until the responsible unit is identified.
10.5.4 Continuous communication must be maintained with Range Control on SINCGARS primary
frequency 36.100, or alternate frequency 36.900.
10.6 PALADIN AND ALL TOWED HOWITZERS: Reference and follow FM 3-09.8, Chapter 2, paragraph
2-18.a., page 2-52 for Paladin Firing Safety information.
10.6.1 PADS, IPADS, or 2 secure PLGRS will be used to obtain center of battery for paladin use at
each firing position prior to firing.
10.6.2 Paladin units may travel with fuzed ammunition (only HE/PD) when the onboard fire extinguisher
system is operational.
10.6.3 All ammunition must be secured properly prior to transporting.
10.6.4 All howitzers within the 750m goose egg must have a safety present prior to firing and updated
after moving within the goose egg, per FM 3-09.8.
10.7 MULTIPLE LAUNCH ROCKET SYSTEM (MLRS)
10.7.1 Requirements/Procedures for Live-Fire
a) General firing conditions
1) Only M28A1 Reduced Range Practice Rocket (RRPR) can be fired on Camp Ripley, due to the
size of the installation and the impact areas.
2) The RRPR is not certified for overhead fire. All non-mission essential personnel will be cleared
from the entire SDZ.
3) Area F is the area immediately to the rear of the launcher directly exposed to blast
overpressure, fragments, and debris from rocket launcher. Area F extends 350 m on each side of the
launcher, and 400 m to the rear of the launcher. Personnel are prohibited from occupying Area F during
firing. A noise hazard area extends an additional 500 m past Area F, and may only be occupied by
mission essential personnel wearing approved hearing protection.
b) MLRS Firing Points
1) Hendrickson Impact Area center mass grid is UM 90201654.
2) Leach Impact Area center mass grid is UM 91822529.
3) Camp Ripley Maximum Quadrant Elevation (Max QE) is 26,000 feet MSL.
4) For the OPAREA Method of Computing Safety, there are four established Operation Areas on
Camp Ripley: #1-West, #2-Center, #3-East, and #4-Arno. Surface Danger Zone Overlays and SDZ
Information Cards are available at Range Control. (see Range Control for updated and changed SDZ’s)
c) For the Firing Point Method of Computing Safety, the firing position will give Range Control the
following information in the Range Opening/Closing Checklist:
35
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
1) The Firing Point Grid Coordinate (8-digit minimum)
2) Center Mass of the Targets Grid Coordinate (8-digit minimum)
3) The Fire Desk Operator will then enter these coordinates into the Range Mangers Tool Kit
(RMTK) SDZ Tool.
4) Once the SDZ Tool creates the SDZ, the Fire Desk Operator will ensure that the SDZ falls within
the Impact Area boundaries.
5) The Fire Desk Operator then calls Miller Army Airfield to request the opening of an Air Advisory
Block.
6) When all safety criteria are met, the Fire Desk Operator will “Open” the firing position.
c) Administrative (Unit Responsibility)
1) Provide sufficient detail personnel to serve as a fire fighting team. The team will have an
NCOIC, vehicle with radio, and sufficient firefighting equipment (to include 5 gallon water cans).
2) Provide visual observers positioned to verify warhead event/impact, with binoculars, and a
vehicle with operational radio. They will monitor the designated radio net. Observers will be trained by
the unit to determine warhead event/impact location. The observers will have a Camp Ripley map, with a
safety overlay.
3) Coordinate with Range Control for Reduced Range Practice Rocket (RRPR) road guard and
firefighting equipment requirements and support.
d) Observation of Rounds
1) Radar will be used, in conjunction with forward observers, when visual observation is
limited/restricted. The radar operator will operate in the “Friendly Fire” mode, and the time interval
between rockets for multiple round missions will not be less than 30 seconds (if only radar is used).
2) Rockets not observed, or observed out of safe, will be reported immediately to Range Control.
The unit will place itself in cease-fire-freeze, pending a determination of the problem resulting in the
unobserved, or out of safe, rocket.
10.8 RESTRICTIONS ON FIRING WHITE PHOSPHORUS: Firing of White Phosphorus is prohibited in
sensitive wetland areas within the Leach and Hendrickson Impact Areas.
10.8.1 White Phosphorus will not be fired directly into, or within 100 meters of, or have airburst directly
over, wetland areas. The sensitive areas, including the 100-meter buffer zone, are identified on a map at
Range Control.
10.11 REFERENCES
10.11.1 FM 3-09.60
10.11.2 FM 3-09.70
10.11.3 FM 3-09.8
10.11.4 FM 6-30
10.11.5 FM 6-40 with Change 1
10.11.6 FM 6-50
10.11.7 FM 6-60
10.11.8 USAFAS White Paper, dated 04 DEC 2000
10.11.9 USAFAS White Paper, dated 23 FEB 2001
10.11.10 OP (OBSERVATION POINTS – CHAPTER 1, 1.15.7)
10.11.11 DECLINATION STATIONS (TAB K, RC TABLE DECLINATIONS)
36
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 11 Aviation Range Safety - Aerial Gunnery
11.1 GENERAL INFORMATION
11.1.1 Aerial Gunnery is accomplished on the following ranges.
a) Center Range – computer operated and remote operated, manually scored. Ammunition allowed:
7.62mm, 50 Cal., and TOW missile (inert).
b) East Range - computer operated. Non-Dud producing 20-30mm, 7.62mm, 50 Cal., and TOW
Missile (inert).
c) North Range – computer operated and remote operated, manually scored. Ammunition allowed:
7.62mm, 50 Cal.
d) HENDRICKSON and LEACH Impact Areas are used for 20-30mm HE, 7.62mm, .50 Cal., 2.75inch rocket systems, and TOW missile (inert).
11.1.2 Direct RFMSS Reservation submittal, or an ATS Form 23 must be submitted to the Post
Operations Office NLT 90 days prior to reserve the ranges.
11.1.3 Target Matrix must be submitted to Range Control NLT 90 days prior to firing. See blank
Target Matrix in TAB J.
11.2 FIRING OPERATIONS - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
11.2.1 Qualified standardization instructor pilots, or instructor pilots having immediate access to
positive control of the aircraft and weapon systems being fired, will accompany pilots and gunners who
are not qualified and current in aircraft during firing. Qualified non-rated crewmember flight instructors, or
non-rated crewmember standardization instructors having immediate access to the weapon systems
being fired, will accompany door gunners who are not current and qualified.
11.2.2 Pilots and gunners are qualified when they:
a) Successfully complete an approved qualification course, or qualification or transition training in
accordance with an approved program of instruction.
b) Demonstrate flight and weapon systems proficiency in accordance with TC 3-04.11, FM 3-04.140, and
the appropriate aircrew-training manual.
11.2.3 Pilots and gunners will be familiar with the impact area, firing limits, SDZs, and safety regulations
for the range on which they will fire.
11.2.4 The firing aircraft pilot in command will ensure that firing aircraft are properly oriented with SDZs
and are safe to fire. Command and control aircraft may be used at the commander’s discretion.
11.2.5 Communications will be maintained between the OIC and Range Control. All firing elements
must maintain positive two-way communications with the OIC. Firing will be suspended immediately upon
loss of communications with Range Control, the OIC, or firing elements.
11.2.6 Airspace routing used by armed aircraft flying from the ammunition-loading site to the firing
range and return will be plotted on a map or chart, and will be maintained by both the using unit and
Range Control. This course will be selected so that accidental firing at any point on the course will
minimize risk to life and property.
11.2.7 Crash rescue personnel will be knowledgeable of safety precautions associated with armed
aircraft and impact areas, and the hazards associated with burned aircraft (for example, radioactive and
advanced composite materials).
11.2.8 The OIC of aerial gunnery ranges must be aircraft and weapon system qualified, and is in
charge of the entire range operation.
a) The OIC must observe all aspects of aerial gunnery - this may require the OIC to be airborne with
communication to Range Control.
b) The OIC ensures firing aircraft is properly positioned within established SDZ.
c) The OIC conducts a Safety Briefing before firing to include location of firing points, range limits,
start and cease fire lines, target areas and malfunction/emergency landing sites.
d) Malfunction pads must accommodate SDZ for the aircraft weapon system, or a natural or manmade barrier to contain accidental discharge of weapon systems.
11.2.9 The RSO is weapon systems qualified, and is responsible for monitoring range operations to
ensure compliance with range safety procedures. The RSO reports directly to the range OIC.
11.3 FIRING CONDITIONS - GENERAL PROCEDURES
11.3.1 Commanders will develop and implement an aggressive program to ensure crew coordination
and target identification procedures concurrent with the gunnery-training program.
37
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
11.3.2 Aircraft weapon systems will be loaded or unloaded only in approved areas. Selection of these
areas will ensure total containment in the event of accidental discharge. The weapon systems dispersion
angle and maximum range will be considered if natural or manmade barriers are not used.
11.3.3 The master arm switch will be placed in the safe position before leaving any firing position. Prior
to leaving a range area, firing aircraft will be statically grounded; weapon switches turned off, and
inspected to ensure that no ammunition remains on board the aircraft. The RSO will ensure that all
weapon systems are clear of ammunition, and placed on safe prior to departing the range.
11.3.4 When training requirements dictate, BN Commanders or higher may direct the loading and
unloading of ammunition from aircraft while the engines are running. Such operations are authorized
when a thorough Composite Risk Management Worksheet (DA Form 7566) has been conducted, control
measures implemented, and residual risks identified and accepted by the appropriate commander.
11.3.5 When conducting running fires, ground markers are required for the start and cease-fire lines.
Hover fire requires marking of the firing position. Markers may be illuminated and thermalized when
thermal weapon sights are used to ensure proper target area identification at times of limited visibility.
Additional ground markings may be used at the discretion of the commanding officer or the RCO.
11.3.6 Qualified and current pilots or gunners require only start and cease fire line markings, day and
night.
11.3.7 Pilots or gunners that are not qualified or current in aircraft or weapon systems, require a ground
marking for both day and night firing points and limits of fire.
11.3.8 Ammunition loading and unloading is only accomplished in areas approved by the RCO.
11.3.9 Before aircraft move to a refueling point, they will have all rockets unloaded, and all guns
cleared and safe. Aircraft hot refueling is prohibited without approval of the RCO.
11.3.10 Diving fire is prohibited without approval of the RCO.
11.3.11 TOW guided missile wire will be recovered by ground personnel after each aircraft fire mission.
11.3.12 Range Control will designate emergency landing areas for use by aircraft experiencing
weapons malfunctions or in-flight emergencies.
11.3.13 Lasers will be used as outlined in Chapter 16 of this regulation.
11.3.14 Fuel spill materials (spill kits) will be on site at each refuel area or FARP. Fuel tankers used to
refuel aircraft will be equipped with sufficient absorbent material to handle small to moderate spills.
11.4 GUNNERY OPERATIONS
11.4.1 Door gunnery operations will be conducted according to FM 3-04.140, and the appropriate TM
for the specific type of aircraft.
11.4.2 All personnel on the aircraft when firing weapons will wear at least approved single hearing
protection.
11.4.3 Training operations conducted in conjunction with aerial rocket firing will be suspended if
sustained winds or gusts exceed 30 knots.
11.5 REFERENCES
11.5.1 FM 3-04.140 w/Change 1
11.5.2 TC 3-04.11
38
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 12 Air Defense Artillery Weapon Systems
12.1 GENERAL INFORMATION: Due to the size of the Camp Ripley Installation, none of the current
ADA weapon systems are authorized for live fire. The M3P .50 Cal. Machine Gun may be fired from the
Avenger.
12.2 AIR DEFENSE RADIO CONTROLLED MINIATURE AERIAL TARGET (RCMAT)
12.2.1 Use of RCMATs will be requested on ATS Form 23. CommandersO-5 (O-4P) and above, will
submit a Safety Memorandum (see TAB J for sample document), listing those individuals who have been
trained and tested on the operation of RCMATs. Operators will attend a Range Control Safety Briefing
prior to range operations.
12.2.2 RCMATs will not be flown over troops, or within 200 meters of the Camp Ripley boundaries. All
RCMATs will be grounded immediately, if aircraft are observed in the area.
12.2.3 All precautions in TM 9-1550-416-10/14 will be followed. Range Control will coordinate with
Miller Army Airfield during RCMATs training.
12.2.4 Use of RCMATs in the Cantonment Area will be coordinated through the Camp Ripley
Operations Office, as well as Camp Ripley Security, NLT 14 days in advance.
12.3 REFERENCE: FM 44-18-1
39
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 13 Chemical Agents, Smoke, and Aircraft Spray
13.1 GENERAL
13.1.1 NOTE: Red smoke and Red Star Clusters are not necessarily used for emergency
situations and can be used for training.
13.1.2 C Range is the authorized NBC Course/Gas Chamber.
13.1.3 The OIC and RSO must meet rank/grade requirements of Table 1-1, page 2, of this Regulation.
13.1.4 Operational requirements:
a) The range must have two forms of communications to open and close the range with Range
Control.
b) Hourly communication checks are not required, but the site must monitor Range Control
SINCGARS primary frequency 36.100, or alternate frequency 36.900, during smoke and chemical agent
operations.
c) Medical support is required on site. Units using the C Range may utilize medical support assets from
other A-Complex facilities, provided communications are in place.
13.1.5 Personnel will carry their protective masks in training when using:
a) Fog oil
b) HC (Hexachloroethane zinc). HC smoke can kill if improperly used. This smoke contains
corrosive substances that can destroy lung tissue, causing the lungs to fill with fluid in a condition known
as “Dry-Land Drowning.” In some cases, the body can also be poisoned by zinc metal oxide in the
smoke. The problem symptomatic effects are usually delayed. Soldiers do not realize they inhaled too
much until hours, or even days, after the exposure.
c) RP (Red Phosphorous)
d) WP (White Phosphorous)
e) Colored and diesel smokes
f) All Riot Control agents
13.1.6 Personnel will utilize their protective masks:
a) Before exposure to any concentration of smoke from M8 white smoke grenades or HC smoke
pots.
b) When operating in smoke that has a visibility less than 50 meters.
c) When operating in a smoke haze with visibility greater than 50 meters for over 4 hours.
d) For smoke generator operator personnel when it is impossible to stay up-wind of the smoke.
e) When using smoke in MOUT training, HC smoke will not be used anywhere within the MOUT site,
or any enclosed areas such as buildings, trenches, vehicles, etc.
13.2 RIOT CONTROL AGENTS
13.2.1 The use of riot control agents and smoke operations on Camp Ripley must be coordinated with
Range Control NLT 30 days in advance. Required information is:
a) Type of agent or smoke to be used
b) Proposed location of exercise
c) Quantity to be used
d) Duration of use
e) Date and time of usage
13.2.2 Personnel must be evaluated by unit medical personnel, prior to being exposed to riot control
agents, to ensure they are free of the following health conditions:
a) Respiratory ailments
b) Active dermatitis, to include severe facial acne
c) Pregnancy
13.2.3 Authorized riot control agents on Camp Ripley are:
a) CS
b) CSX
c) CS-1
d) CS-2
e) CR
13.2.4 NOTE: Only CS in capsule form may be used in the CS Chamber. NO EXCEPTIONS!
40
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
13.2.5 Only chemical qualified soldiers may supervise the use of riot control agents. Officers are
considered chemical qualified if they possess AOC 74A or SSI 3R. Enlisted soldiers are considered
chemical qualified if they possess MOS 54B or SQI C.
13.2.6 Riot Control agents will not be used under conditions that are dangerous to life or property. The
use of riot control agents is limited to 1200 meters from Camp Ripley boundaries, 500 meters from the
nearest heavily traveled road, and 1200 meters from the Cantonment Area, Ammunition Supply Point,
and Miller Army Airfield.
13.2.7 Unprotected personnel will not be exposed to riot control agents for no longer than 15 seconds.
13.2.8 Reduce the MOPP level under high heat stress conditions whenever possible.
13.3 SMOKE: The use of smoke in training poses special health and safety issues. See paragraph 13.1
for safety precautions.
13.3.1 Soldiers involved in FTXs using smoke must receive a Safety Briefing concerning the use of
smoke from their chain of command.
13.3.2 CS and HC hand grenades will not be fired closer than 30 meters from personnel, or used in
confined spaces such as tents, vehicles, buildings, and occupied tunnels.
13.3.3 FS (sulfur trioxide-chlorosulfonic acid solution) and FM (titanium tetrachloride) smoke will not be
used in training.
13.3.4 NOTE: Do not detonate a smoke grenade closer than 1200 meters from Camp Ripley
boundaries, public roads, or other restricted areas, as determined by the RCO.
13.4 SMOKE POTS
13.4.1 Request for the use of smoke generators and smoke pots must be submitted to Range Control
NLT 48 hours in advance. Requests will include location, duration of smoke, and dispersion pattern.
13.4.2 M-5 Smoke pots must:
a) Be maintained and kept dry prior to use.
b) Not be fired inside any enclosed or poorly ventilated area.
c) Have glasses or eye protection in use when igniting.
d) Be 5 meters from friendly troops.
e) Have 30 meters of WD-1/TT wire when being electrically fired.
13.4.3 Danger - To prevent facial burns, never allow the firers face over the top of the smoke pot
while igniting the striker.
13.4.4 Select an area free from ignitable material to eliminate the possibility of range fires when using
smoke pots
13.4.5 Smoke pots or smoke generators will not be used within 1200 meters of the ASP, Cantonment
Area, Miller Army Airfield, public highways, or the Camp Ripley boundaries.
13.5 AIRCRAFT SPRAY: Aerial disbursement of chemical training agents will be considered on a caseby-case basis, with coordination through the Range Control Office. The chemical OIC must submit the
request NLT 30 days in advance. Requests must include the following items:
13.5.1 Grid Location
13.5.2 Type of chemical agent
13.5.3 Type of aircraft used for disbursement
13.5.4 Altitude of disbursement
13.5.5 Duration of each disbursement
13.5.6 Amount of agent to be disbursed
13.5.7 SOPs covering all contingencies and safety procedures
13.5.8 Composite Risk Management Worksheet (DA Form 7566)
13.6 REFERENCES
13.6.1 FM 3-11.11
13.6.2 FM 3-11.22
13.6.3 FM 3-50
13.6.4 FM 3-101-1
41
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 14 Non-Lethal Weapons
14.1 DEFINITION: Department of Defense Directive (DODD) 3000.3 defines non-lethal weapons (NLW)
as "weapons that are explicitly designed and primarily employed so as to incapacitate personnel or
materiel while minimizing fatalities, permanent injury to personnel, and undesired damage to property and
the environment." Furthermore, “unlike conventional lethal weapons that destroy their targets principally
through blast, penetration, and fragmentation, NLW employ means other than gross physical destruction
to prevent the target from functioning. NLW are intended to have relatively reversible effects on personnel
and materiel."
14.2 GENERAL
14.2.1 NOTE: The use of NLW/Less-Lethal Weapons are required to use the range control
BLANKS/SIMUNITIONS/LESS-LETHAL RANGES OPENING/CLOSING CHECKLIST.
14.2.2 The term "non-lethal" does not mean zero mortality or nonpermanent damage. Fatal injuries can
occur if munitions are employed at a distance that is less than the determined minimum safe engagement
range.
14.2.3 The Inter-Service Non-Lethal Individual Weapons Instructors Course is the only course in the
Department of Defense that is certified to produce instructors who will train individuals in the proper
employment of NLWs.
14.2.4 Purpose: This outline provides a base plan for range operations and range safety from which
commanders can design safe realistic training that meets the needs of their subordinate units for
conducting Less-Lethal Weapons Training.
14.2.5 Less-Lethal Weapons Concept of Training
a) To train units from the individual level up to the commands level on the usage and employment of
Less-Lethal technology both in civil disturbance and combat operations.
b) This training is based on doctrine, tactics, techniques, and procedures. It does not replace a
commander’s lethal capability. The use of Less-Lethal adds to the number of options a commander can
use. It gives a course of action when the use of lethal force may not be the best call for the situation.
14.2.6 Safety Considerations:
a) Less-Lethal Weapons are non-lethal by design and intent only. Failure to adhere to the
Minimum Safe Distance (MSD) will result in serious bodily injury or DEATH!
b) All troops on the firing line must wear eye & ear protection, as well as helmet and IBA.
c) Lethal ammo and Less-Lethal ammo will be stored separately.
d) Never point a laser (Class 2 or Higher) at anyone’s face for more than 5 seconds.
e) Troops training with EMDs (X26 & X26E Taser) are not authorized to take a live stun from an
EMD. It is prohibited to use on US soldiers by the Dept. of the Army.
f) OC spray training must be done by strict DOD standard using an INIWIC instructor. OC spray
training will not be done inside of a building or enclosed structure.
g) The LRAD must be approved through Range Control NLT 90 days prior to us
14.2.7 Authorized Weapons
Authorized Weapons
M320
Ammunition
40mm NLWM
FN 303 Cal.
.68 Cal. Projectile
VADs
Wave Technology
Light Technology
Acoustic Technology
X26/X26 E (EMD)
OC Spray
Shotgun 12 gage
Multi Launchers
VMS
M315
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Air Cartridge
Inert / live
12 GA. NLWM
40MM
M5 MCCM
Air Cartridge
42
# of Rounds
Per training requirements
Per training requirements (the use of the Ca.
permanent paint and OC round are prohibited)
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Per training requirements
Per training requirements
Per training requirements
Per training requirements
Per training requirements
Per training requriements
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
14.2.8 Authorized Munitions
Less-Lethal Munitions
12 GA. Beanbag (USMC) AA29
Minimum Safe Distance
30m
12 GA. M1021 Fin Stabilized (ARMY)
AA51
12 GA. Fin Stabilized (USMC) AA31
10m
12 GA. M1013 Crowd Dispersal (ARMY)
AA52
40mm M1029 Crowd Dispersal (Army)
BA13
40mm Rubber Ball (USMC) BA08
10m
40mm Foam Baton (USMC) BA07
10m
40mm M1006 Sponge Grenade (Army)
BA06
Rubber Ball Grenade (USMC) GG04
10m
M5 MCCM (Army) WA97
12 GA Launching Cartridge
M84 Stun Grenade (Army) GG09
(M315 Munitions)
CS-L96A1, M98 Flash Bang, M99 NonLethal Blunt Trauma
12 GA. Beanbag (USMC) AA29
5m
N/A
N/A
50m
15m
10m
10m
4m
30m
Engagement Ranges
Point=30m
Area=50m
Point=10-20m
Point=15-30m
Area=Beyond 30m
Point=10-20m
Area=Beyond 30m
Point=10-30m
Area=Beyond 30m
Point=10m
Area=10-50m
Point=10m
Area=10-30m
Point=10-50m
Area=Beyond 50m
Effective blast range=2-3m
Effective range=15-20m / 5070m with launching cup
Area = 5-15m
N/A
N/A
Area=50-100m
Point=30m
Area=50m
14.2.9 Range Usage: Any Established Range may be utilized for Non-Lethal weapons training and
qualification IAW the Camp Ripley Range Operations Appendix. Non-established ranges may be used to
conduct less-lethal weapons training when applicable. Using unit must turn in a target matrix and training
plan to Range Control NLT 90 days prior of the use of a non-established range.
14.2.10 NOTE: ALL Simunitions, CCMK, and Non-Lethal Weapons to OPEN the ranges with an
OIC and RSO, have a Range Flag Up, and perform Hourly Commo Checks.
14.3 REFERENCES
14.3.1 AR 385-63
14.3.2 FM 100-1
14.3.3 FM 7.0
14.3.4 FM 7.1
14.3.5 FM 25.4
14.3.6 MCRP 3-0A
14.3.7 MCRP 3-0B
14.3.8 FM 3-19.10
14.3.9 FM 90-40
14.3.10 FM 3-07.22
14.3.11 MCI 7400
14.3.12 FN 303 OPERATORS MANUAL
14.3.13 M2 (VLAD) TM 5-4240-536-10
14.3.14 M1 (PVAD) TM 9-6350-382-12
43
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 15 Mines, Firing Devices, Trip Flares, Simulators, and Explosive Charges
15.1 GENERAL
15.1.1 The OIC and RSO must meet rank/grade requirements from Table 1-1, TAB K, of this
Regulation.
15.1.2 L Range and six other sites are the only approved demolitions training sites in the field training
area, per the Camp Ripley Environmental Noise Management Plan, dated AUG 1999. See list in Chapter
18, 18.7.3.
15.1.3 Units must submit their DEMO Plans to Range Control NLT 90 days prior to range usage.
Plans must include wiring diagrams and TNT equivalency conversions.
15.1.4 General safe practices for handling and transporting explosives are prescribed in TM 9-1375213-12, FM 3.34.214, and DA Pamphlet 385-64.
15.1.5 A Five (5)-minute to Initiation, AND a One (1)-minute to Blast, warning calls to Range
Control are required for all demolition blasts.
15.1.6 DANGER - Do not conduct demolition work during an electrical storm, snow storm, or
near any device that emits static electricity.
15.1.7 DANGER - Handle blasting caps with extreme care and always carry them in a cap box or
non-metallic container to provide protection against shock.
15.1.8 DANGER - Do not store blasting caps closer than 25 feet from explosives.
15.1.9 NOTE: All poundage listed in this chapter is in TNT equivalents.
15.1.10 Gases released by detonation of explosives are toxic. Avoid exposure to fumes. Position
personnel upwind from detonation points, and wait until the smoke and fumes disperse before proceeding
down range.
15.1.11 Buried charges will be primed with detonating cord leading to above ground electric or nonelectric blasting caps. Blasting caps will not be buried underground as they are sensitive to shock and
may detonate if hit by a metal tool or other hard object.
15.1.12 Detonating cord should be used to prime charges on above ground charges to minimize the
need to use blasting caps. Once the explosive charges are primed with detonating cord, the detonating
cord will be initiated with an above ground electric, non-electric blasting cap, or modernized demolition
initiator (MDI).
15.1.13 Detonation circuits will not be connected or armed on any munitions unless the intent is to
detonate the munitions. When munitions are to be detonated, the area will be cleared of all non-mission
essential personnel. Live blasting caps or other live detonators will not be located at training sites if
munitions are not to be detonated.
15.1.14 All personnel on any demolitions range will wear a Kevlar helmet, protective body
armor, single hearing protection, and ballistic eye protection, regardless of their position on the
range.
15.1.15 Only mission essential personnel will be allowed in the SDZ during firings.
15.1.16 Mixing of live and inert demolitions for training is prohibited.
15.1.17 When temporary open storage of explosives is used, stacks will not exceed 500 lbs. of
explosives. Distance between stacks will not be less than 45 meters. Demolitions simulators are
considered live munitions.
15.1.18 Prepare charges a minimum of 25 feet from stored demolitions.
15.1.19 Test all electrical blasting caps with a galvanometer before connecting to any explosive circuit.
15.1.20 Procedures in FM 3.34.214 and DA Pamphlet 385-63 (Chapter 15, Section 15-1, Paragraphs
d., e., and f) will be followed for all demolitions training on Camp Ripley. Both publications, as well as RC
Form 5 (Surface Danger Area Overlay Information Safety Card/Demo), must be on the demolition site at
all times. Contact Range Control for questions regarding specific types of demolition charges, fired on
various target media.
15.1.21 Pack unexpended demolitions in original containers and return to the ASP.
44
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
15.2 DEMOLITIONS AND EXPLOSIVES
15.2.1 L Range is an Established Demolition Range, complete with viewing bunker. The southern
portion of the range is the Small Charge Area (less than 100 lbs.). The northern portion is the Large
Charge Area (100-200 lbs.). A full Bangalore Torpedo kit can be fired here. See range map in TAB A.
15.2.2 DEMO-5 is the new Light Demolitions Range UM 89562718 (located in TA 73). Maximum
allowed charge is 100 lbs. TNT equivalent.
15.2.3 NOTE: The maximum allowable charge is the equivalent of 200 pounds of TNT per blast,
10 times per year, during daylight hours only, and a minimum of 30 minutes between blasts.
15.2.4 There are five approved Field Training Area Demolition Sites. They are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DEMO-1 UM 91321336
DEMO-2 UM 91851580
DEMO-3 UM 87841521
DEMO-4 UM 90342588
DEMO-6 UM 90782840
M Range Demo Site
OP-2 Demo Site
Located to the SE of Chain Barrier C-5 / Located in TA40
Located at the Seal Cabin
Located in TA75
15.2.5 The Live-Fire Exercise Breach Facility (BREACH) is also an approved demolition site. The main
purposed of the range is for breach training utilizing using breaching charges only.
15.2.6 Bangalore Torpedoes are limited to ½ Kit (5 sections) per shot in the DEMO-1 through DEMO-6
Sites.
15.2.7 The firing, handling, storing, and transporting of explosives will be IAW the provisions set forth in
DA Pamphlet 385-63, this Regulation, FM 3.34.214, TM 9-1300-206, and TM 9-1375-200.
15.2.8 Demolition explosives and associated items forecast for training are the responsibility of the
using unit.
15.2.9 A five-minute and a one-minute warning will be transmitted to Range Control prior to initiating
any firing device. Range Control must be notified when blasting is complete.
15.2.10 Demolition operations will be discontinued during, or upon the approach of, an electrical storm.
15.2.11 The OIC will ensure that personnel are at least the minimum safe distances as prescribed in
DA Pamphlet 385-63, before any demolition is fired. Charges will not be detonated until all personnel are
at the safe distances.
15.2.12 Priming personnel must wear protective body armor while priming charges. All charges will be
dual primed and set in place, not thrown.
15.2.13 After the demolition exercise is completed, the area will be checked for unfired demolitions and
explosives.
15.2.14 Charges placed on steel are not to exceed 2 pounds unless use of an approved steel-cutting
chamber is used, then the charges placed on steel will not exceed the chamber rating. Steel cutting
charges will be fired within an appropriate confining structure in an excavated pit at least 1 meter deep. If
fired in an open pit, a mat made of hemp-type material must cover the charge.
15.2.15 Insertion of blasting caps in charges will be performed by not more than five personnel, under
the supervision of one supervisor (protective body armor is required). The remainder of the unit will
withdraw to a safe position prior to insertion.
15.2.16 Trees larger than 2 inches in diameter will not be cut without the approval, and marking by, of
the Training Area Coordinator.
15.2.17 All debris from demolitions and associated activities will be removed, and craters will be filled
and compacted.
15.2.18 The firing unit is responsible for covering all holes resulting from blasts. Range Control will
inspect the area prior to clearing the area.
15.2.19 Demolition misfires are the responsibility of the individual(s) who set the charge. Follow
procedures outlined in Chapter 6, section II, FM 3.34.214.
15.2.20 NOTE: The maximum allowable charge for the five additional sites is the equivalent of
150 pounds of TNT per blast, during daylight hours only, with a minimum of 30 minutes between
blasts.
15.3 FIRING DEVICES
15.3.1 Electrical firing will be used with extreme caution and will be replaced with non-electric firing
systems when the possibility exists of unintentional detonation from extraneous electrical sources.
15.3.2 Electric firing will not be performed in training within 155 meters of energized power lines.
45
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
15.3.3 Static electricity creates a potential hazard when explosive training operations are being
conducted.
15.3.4 A dual electric disconnect system will be used when installing electrical firing systems on
demolitions. The main source of power will be turned off and a lockout device will be used.
15.3.5 Instructions in TM 9-1375-213-12 will be followed when installing, arming, and disarming firing
devices.
15.3.6 Firing devices and fuzes either with or without the standard bases will not be pointed at
personnel.
15.3.7 Standard bases containing unfired percussion caps, firing devices, and fuzes will not be carried
in the pocket.
15.3.8 Standard bases containing unfired percussion caps will be kept separated from firing devices
and fuzes until the firing device or fuze is ready to be installed in the mine or booby trap.
15.3.9 Safety pins on firing devices and fuzes should be checked for ease of movement before
attaching the standard base.
15.3.10 Before removing the tripwire, the positive safety will be installed on armed firing devices or
fuzes having a tripwire attached.
15.4 SHAPED CHARGES
15.4.1 Shaped charges will be oriented so that gas jets will be directed toward the target. Charges
should be placed on the side of the target nearest the observers when practicable, so that the blast is
directed away from them. Observers will be at least 100 meters away in a missile-proof shelter, 275
meters away in a defilade, or 1000 meters away for unprotected personnel from shaped charges when
firing.
15.4.2 All personnel will wear Kevlar helmets, protective body armor, and single hearing protection.
Eye protection should be worn.
15.5 BANGALORE TORPEDOES
15.5.1 Bangalore Torpedoes will only be fired in a horizontal position on the ground.
15.5.2 Personnel will be in a missile-proof shelter 100 meters from the charge, or 200 meters away in a
defilade.
15.5.3 All personnel will wear Kevlar helmets, protective body armor, and single hearing protection.
Eye protection should also be worn.
15.6 MINE-CLEARING LINE CHARGE (MICLIC)
15.6.1 Because of high exhaust temperatures, the MICLIC will not be towed behind a M1 series tank.
15.6.2 Spectators will not be allowed within the SDZ or noise hazard area during firing.
15.6.3 Only firing personnel are allowed in Area F.
15.6.4 The M68 inert charge should not be fired more than three times, as additional firings may result
in the breakage of the charge blocks cord and/or erratic flight of the rocket.
15.7 CRATERING CHARGES
15.7.1 The minimum safe/standoff distance for personnel not in missile-proof shelters are as follows:
a) Up to 5 lbs.-100 meters
b) Up to 66 lbs.-300 meters
c) Over 66 lbs.-500 meters
15.7.2 Personnel located in a missile-proof shelter may be located 100 meters from the detonation site.
15.7.3 All personnel will wear Kevlar helmet, protective body armor, and single hearing protection. Eye
protection should be worn.
15.7.4 All cratering charges will be dual primed with detonating cord. Use of M151 and M152 for dual
priming is authorized. Blasting caps will not be placed underground. Electric or non-electric caps will be
attached to the detonating cord above ground.
15.8 MINES
15.8.1 Practice and inert mines will be color-coded and will have the appropriate identification marking
stenciled on them. Service, practice, inert mines, and fuzes will not be mixed.
15.8.2 Practice mines and their fuzes contain a small, low explosive charge or a smoke producing
increment. They will be color-coded and separated.
15.8.3 Claymore mines
a) Claymore mines can be fired on J or L Ranges, or on other sites approved by RCO.
b) Prior to firing, the OIC checks all mines to ensure that the following has been done:
46
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
1) Mines are installed correctly and facing into the impact area.
2) The face of the mine marked "Front Toward Enemy", and the arrows on top of the mine, are
pointed down range.
3) All mines will be secured until the range OIC directs their issue.
4) Emplaced mines will not be disarmed except by order of the OIC.
5) Firing devices will only be connected at the command of the OIC.
6) When more than one mine is to be fired, the OIC will ensure that previous firings have not
dislodged the other mines in the impact area.
7) After firing, the impact area will be inspected to ensure that all mines have detonated.
8) When mines are fired, no personnel can be within the 16 meters back blast area. Personnel
located in the 16-100 meters back blast area will be in a fighting position, or behind an approved berm.
9) All personnel will wear Kevlar helmet, protective body armor, and single hearing protection. Eye
protection should be worn.
10) Misfires will be handled IAW FM 23-23.
15.8.4 The Volcano multiple delivery mine system is a rapid mine dispensing system for launching
antitank mines from various vehicles. The ground system uses 5-ton cargo or dump trucks to dispense
the mines. RC Form 1 must be on site for proper deployment of the Volcano, per the SDZ.
15.9 TRIP FLARES (M48 AND M49)
15.9.1 Use inert flares to teach students in the use, emplacement, and fuzing of service flares.
15.9.2 Fence or guard each service trip flare used in training to prevent personnel from approaching
within 2 meters of the emplaced flare.
15.9.3 Clear trip flare positions of flammable material to prevent accidental fires. Do not use the M48
trip flare in areas where fire could cause serious damage
.
15.10 SIMULATORS
15.10.1 M80 explosive simulators detonate 3 to 5 seconds after ignition of the fuse cord and are
capable of causing serious injury. Fuse cord tips should not be split, since this reduces burning time, and
increases the potential for injury to personnel. Do not use M1 and M2 type fuse igniters to ignite the M80
fuse cord or hold the M80 simulator when ignited.
15.10.2 Procedures for the safe use of other simulators are contained in TM 9-1370-206-10, TM 91370-207-10, and TM 9-1370-208-10. No attempt will be made to disarm or disassemble simulators.
15.10.3 Commercially manufactured fireworks (designated for civilian use) will not be handled, stored,
or used in any way by military personnel on any installation.
15.10.4 An OIC trained in demolitions supervises emplacement and firing of the detonator. Emplace
IAW procedures outlined in FM 30-101.
15.10.5 Each unit must have a dedicated evacuation vehicle with qualified medical aid personnel, and a
unit fire fighting team available in the immediate vicinity, after the simulator is exploded. These personnel
remain until the area is cleared.
15.10.5 IED Simulation Kit: The IED Simulation kit and BES provides the tools required to train war
fighters for one of the deadliest killers on today’s battlefield.
a) The IED Simulation kit consists of the following:
1 large Simulator IED (T155FT-V2)
1 Receiver/Transmitter (RT01K4)
1 Mortar Launcher (T81MSD)
1 Pipe Bomb (T50PB)
1 Land Mine (T80PM)
1 Booby Trap (T12TWC)
1 Suicide Bomber Vest (T48SBV)
b) Camp Ripley has 2 IED Simulation kits.
c) A 2-hour class is required for the Unit’s OIC/RSO before they are allowed to draw the equipment.
The class is conducted at Supply and Services, Bldg.2-207, 320-616-3129.
d) IED Simulation kit must be requested NLT 90 days in advance. Request for use of the simulators
goes through Supply and Services.
e) Prior to using the kit, the Unit must give the location of the IED Simulation Kit usage to Range
Control.
15.10.6 NOTE: The OIC declares the area is clear before any personnel are permitted within 500
feet of the blast point.
47
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
15.10.7 The OIC ensures no loose rocks or other objects, which could serve as missiles, are above the
ground, within 18 inches of the sound charge.
15.10.8 Locate the firing point upwind from the point of detonation.
15.10.9 CAUTION - Do not remove the cardboard separator, which is stapled just above the
smoke charge. Removal of the separator damages the cables and may result in a malfunction of
the simulator.
15.11 LIVE FIRE EXERCISE BREACH FACILITY: The Breach Facility is used to train soldiers the
technical aspects of breaching techniques on a semi-annual basis. It is also used to train TTPs and
explosive techniques not trained on any other type range.
15.11.1 This range has three separate training technique stations:
a) Station 1-Door Breaching-this station has a facade that is 8 feet high with a door opening of 33
inches by 80 inches. Soldiers can conduct mechanical, thermal, ballistic, and explosive door breaching
techniques.
1) Units must let Range Control know if they are going to do shotgun training to breach the door in
the units Demo plan.
b) Station 2-Wall Breaching-this station contains a facade that measures 8 feet high by 20.5 inches
wide. Soldiers can conduct mechanical, thermal, ballistic, and explosive wall breaching.
c) Station 3-Window Breaching-this station contains a facade that measures 8 feet high with three
window openings measuring 32.75 inches by 38.75 inches.
15.11.2 Use C4 to breach hard targets (masonry construction items).
15.11.3 Civilian agencies that utilize this facility will be responsible for replacing all doors and windows
that are destroyed during training.
15.11.4 Charges will not be placed on the metal studs in the Station 2 facade.
15.11.5 All other safety measures listed in this chapter, DA Pamphlet 385-63, FM 3.34.214, and the
Breach Facility SOP must be followed.
15.11.6 Maximum charge is 4 lbs. on this range.
15.11.7 NOTE: ALL UNITS MUST ORDER DOOR MATERIAL AND WINDOWS THROUGH
AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS (320-616-3132/3133) NLT 90 DAYS PRIOR. CIVILIAN AGENCIES
THAT UTILIZE THE RANGE MUST REPLACE THE DOORS AND WINDOWS THAT THEY UTILIZE.
15.12 REFERENCES
15.12.1 FM 3-34
15.12.2 FM 3-34.2
15.12.3 FM 3-34.22
15.12.4 FM 3-34.210
15.12.5 FM 3-34.214 w/Change 1
15.12.6 FM 23-23
15.12.7 TM 9-1300-206
15.12.8 TM 9-1375-200
15.12.9 TM 9-1370-206-10
15.12.10 TM 9-1370-207-10
15.12.11 TM 9-1370-208-10
15.12.12 TM 9-1375-213-12
48
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 16 Laser Range Safety
16.1 GENERAL: The concept of laser range safety is to prevent intra-beam viewing by unprotected
personnel. This chapter prescribes safety procedures to be followed in the use of laser devices.
16.1.1 Lasing is authorized from Range Control approved surveyed positions only.
16.1.2 The laser (Tank, BFV, G/VLLD) will be treated like a direct fire weapon, such as a tank main gun
or 25 mm cannon, and must be coordinated accordingly. Aircrews will not conduct any over the horizon
lasing.
16.1.3 The use of lasers is authorized on the following ranges: OP-1, OP-16, North, East, West,
Center, and any point approved by Range Control.
16.1.4 Any case of suspected eye exposure to laser radiation will be immediately reported to Range
Control for medical evacuation, to ensure performance of an eye examination within 24 hours of
exposure. A Range Accident/Incident Checklist will be filled out and submitted to Range Control
immediately (see TAB C).
16.1.5 Aircrews conducting laser operations will wear laser protective eyewear as required.
16.1.6 Night vision devices will not be used for laser eye protection devices. These devices are not
“coverall” goggles. Laser energy may enter the eye from reflections or from around the tubes. These
devices can be bloomed (white out), damaged, or destroyed from exposure to laser radiation.
16.1.7 NOTE: Lasers will be treated as direct-fire weapons.
16.2 PRECAUTIONS FOR LASER DEVICES: Laser devices can seriously injure the unprotected eyes of
individuals within the laser beam. Intra-beam viewing of either the direct beam or the beam reflected from
a mirror-like surface exposes the unprotected eye to a potential hazard and must be avoided.
16.3 FIRING CONDITIONS
16.3.1 In addition to instructions on particular laser devices or simulators, the following
information is specific for this regulation and installation:
a) OIC and RSO must be certified IAW DA Pamphlet 385-63, and have a Safety Certification
Memorandum on file at Range Control.
b) The OIC and RSO must receive the Range Control Safety Briefing from Range Control prior to
opening any range.
c) The RSO will conduct a detailed safety briefing to the unit conducting laser operation, prior to
opening range.
d) Medical personnel are not required on the laser range. However, proper channels for obtaining
medical assistance should be identified prior to opening the range.
e) Continuously monitor Range Control primary frequency 36.100, and perform hourly
communication checks.
f) Warning signs must be posted, and barriers emplaced, to prevent unprotected personnel from
moving forward of the firing line.
g) A red range flag will be displayed when the range is open.
h) Lasing markers, internal and external, must be emplaced by the unit to identify the left and right
limits (see TC 25-8 pages C-4 and C-5).
i) An approved RC Form 6 (Surface Danger Area Overlay Information Card-Laser) must be utilized
for obtaining left and right deflection limits, and vertical angles.
1) Laser firing points with different safety data on the RC Form 6 (i.e. right and left limits) require
separate OICs and RSOs for each firing point.
2) Emplace the laser directly over the surveyed positioned stake, which is cemented in the ground,
or to the left or right of a tracked vehicle.
3) Ensure adequate backstop is provided for all targets being lased, and target area is free of
specular (mirror-like) surfaces. Examples of specular surfaces are vehicle windows, mirrors, plastic
sheeting, etc. Glossy foliage, raindrops, and other natural objects are not considered specular surfaces.
Report any specular surfaces within your zone of fire to Range Control immediately.
4) The Range OIC will complete a terrain sketch of the sector of fire for the laser prior to laser
operations.
16.3.2 NOTE: Never lase personnel, wildlife, or specular surfaces. Never lase targets within 30
meters of a reflective surface.
49
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
16.4 FORCE ON FORCE EXERCISES: Tactical exercises involving MILES/AGES/AD/TWGSS/PGS do
not require SDZ construction, however NOHD restrictions in MIL-HDBK-828A apply. The Post
Commander may approve tactical exercises involving force-on-force components using laser devices
other than those listed.
16.5 REFERENCES
16.5.1 AR 11-9
16.5.2 AR 40-5
16.5.3 AR 40-46
16.5.4 AR 385-9
16.5.5 FM 6-30
16.5.6 TB-MED 524
16.5.7 TM 9-1260-477-12
50
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 17 Live Fire Exercises
17.1 SAFETY DURING LIVE-FIRE EXERCISES
17.1.1 Live-Fire phases of training must be conducted with maximum realism and safety. If safety or
terrain limitations do require some unrealistic actions to be taken, personnel should be briefed, in detail,
on why artificial actions are required and what the unit would do if confronted with a similar situation in
combat.
17.1.2 A Combined Arms Live-Fire Exercise (CALFEX) (Army)/Combined Arms Exercise (CAX) (Marine
Corps) involves two or more combat arms and/or DOD services. Air and ground weapons will be used in
accordance with current doctrine, unless specifically prohibited from use by this regulation.
17.2 INFORMATION FOR COMMANDERS
17.2.1 Training to permit highly realistic maneuvers and LFXs involves specific personnel safety
requirements. Installation commanders will publish specific range guidance (for example, regulations,
SOPs, and so forth) that apply specifically to their installations. This guidance will define safety
requirements to support live-fire training exercises. Directives developed for a particular location are not
authorized for use at a different location.
17.2.2 Commanders whose units participate in live-fire exercises will—
a) Make certain that all individual gunners including Bradley, tank, and aviation gunners who will take
part in live-fire exercises have fired and passed a qualification course for the weapon or system they will
fire in the exercise.
b) Conduct rehearsal (dry run) exercises prior to the live-fire and maneuver exercise. The
commander will assess the proficiency and experience level of his/her unit and the degree of risk involved
to determine the scope and duration of the rehearsal and if it should be executed on the same range on
which the live-fire and maneuver training will be conducted. The rehearsal should be scheduled as close
to the actual event as is feasible to retain individual situational awareness and skills. Additionally, when
ever feasible, rehearsals will replicate as closely as possible the conditions involved in the actual event.
Such conditions should include but are not limited to time of day, similar terrain, and the status of the
personnel (that is uniforms worn, same equipment carried, and camouflage). In addition, rehearsals will
include a review of range safety requirements for the live fire and maneuver range. The review should
include, but is not limited to: range safety fans (lateral limits), SDZs for weapons and ammunition fired, air
limitations and restrictions for both live-fire and medical evacuation, and emergency and/or casualty
evacuation procedures. Commander, USASOC, may approve deviation from this requirement for Army
Special Forces (ARSOF) units. If ARSOF units are training on a non-USASOC installation, host
installation commander concurrence is required.
c) Orient participants on the capabilities of the weapons used by other components in the
CALFEX/CAX.
d) Designate individuals (such as observer-controllers) who are not part of the tactical or
administrative scheme to monitor safety. These individuals will maintain visual contact with maneuvering
elements and should have some means of signaling a cease-fire. Communications with the tactical
operations center is mandatory. The Marine Corps commander will assess the proficiency and experience
level of his/her unit in determining the quantity of observer-controllers (that is, safety NCOs) required for
the event. Other factors influencing this decision should include but are not limited to: the scheme of
maneuver, geometry of the attack, composition of forces, dispersion of forces, visibility, weather
conditions, and fatigue. Marine Corps observers-controllers report to the exercise range safety officer,
and will have training in local range safety procedures.
17.2.3 For battalion and squadron or larger exercises, a field grade officer will be appointed as the
exercise OIC.
17.3 EXERCISE TRAINING
17.3.1 Units will conduct live-fire exercises only in support of properly identified and trained-tostandards mission essential task list (METL) tasks. Tactics, techniques, and procedures employed during
the live-fire exercises must be consistent with the standards published in the applicable Army Training
Evaluation Program, mission training plan, and/or battle drills. Command approval from the next higher
command is required for any life-fire exercise not consistent with the unit’s established METL.
17.3.2 Detailed written plans will be developed between the RCO and the unit OIC. It will require
submission of formal risk management documentation prior to execution. If residual risk is extremely high,
MACOM commander approval is required. The installation safety director will review the completed plan
and risk management documentation that will include:
51
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
a) A detailed plan of maneuver and fire support.
b) A list of weapons, ammunition, pyrotechnic or smokes, and chemicals to be used.
c) Unit control measures, including means of communication.
d) Terrain feature and facilities required.
17.3.3 Impact distance and limits of advance are as follows:
a) The distances to which unprotected troops can safely move near the impact area (that is, areas A,
B and C) are indicated in the chapter on each weapon or weapons system.
b) To determine how close unprotected troops may maneuver to the target area, an impact area and
an SDZ must be established for each target area used. SDZs must be computed and issued to leaders
and safety personnel before starting the exercise. When several types of weapons are being fired into
one target area, the combined total SDZ (composite SDZ) will govern. These restrictions normally should
not preclude unit commanders from selecting tactically sound supporting weapon positions for their
scheme of maneuver, provided the positions and directions of fire do not exceed the total range area
available for the exercise. When feasible, leaders and safety personnel will be shown the physical limits
of the SDZ by ground survey.
c) The short limit of the impact area may be moved in the direction of the target area by definite
prearrangement to permit forward movement of troops.
d) Demolitions may be used during live-fire exercises according to Chapter 16.
e) Selection of weapon positions will be the responsibility of unit leaders taking part in the exercise.
f) Terrain configuration will be used to enhance safety features when terrain is being selected for livefire exercises involving overhead, flanking fire, or both.
17.3.4 During live-fire exercise planning, the risk management process must address possible hazards
from friendly fire and control measures to reduce or eliminate them, while executing the METL task to
published Army/Marine Corps standards.
17.4 FIRING PRECAUTIONS
17.4.1 Overhead fire of personnel may be authorized, provided they have positive protection from the
munitions being fired. Protected positions for personnel and vehicles are discussed in FM 5–103.
17.4.2 The installation commander (or designated representative) can authorize overhead fire above
unprotected personnel except by weapon systems specifically prohibited.
17.4.3 Weapons specifically authorized for overhead fire of unprotected personnel are—
a) All artillery cannon firing indirect fire. See Chapter 10 for safety precautions.
b) Machine-guns (5.56 mm, 7.62 mm, and .50 caliber) on ground tripods or vehicle mounts (ring
mounts excluded) firing from a stationary position.
17.4.4 Only ammunition approved for overhead fire will be used.
17.4.5 All firing of direct fire weapons will be from positions that provide an unobstructed field of fire.
17.4.6 Overhead fire with machineguns in live-fire exercises will be as follows:
a) Bullets will not be permitted to impact between the firing position and the rear of the line of
unprotected personnel. All impacts should be a minimum of 50 meters beyond the forward line of
unprotected personnel.
b) Positive stops must be used to prevent crossfire and depression of the muzzle during firing.
c) A minimum clearance or safety limit must be established using the guidelines for overhead fire in
FM 23–65 and FM 3–22.68. Marine Corps personnel use Marine Corps Warfighting Publication 3–15.1.
d) Rate of fire will not exceed 70 rounds per minute for 5.56-mm and 7.62-mm machineguns and 40
rounds per minute for .50 caliber machineguns.
e) Weapons will be test fired before delivery of overhead fire to verify effectiveness of the positive
traverse and depression stops.
f) Tracer ammunition may be used as a check to track the projectile flight path.
17.4.7 In addition to “f.” above, the following precautions will apply to overhead fire with machineguns
for a confidence infiltration course.
a) Firing will be from approved platforms as described in FM 21–75.
b) Qualified field maintenance personnel will inspect the mounts and weapons before being declared
safe to deliver overhead fire.
c) A minimum clearance of 2.5 m over the heads of personnel or the highest obstruction within the
field of fire will be maintained. Minimum clearance is the distance between the lowest shot in the
dispersion pattern (as determined by the test firing) and the bodies of individuals in erect positions on the
highest point of ground, log, or other obstacle over which personnel must travel, or heights of barbed wire
strands or posts on the course, whichever is higher.
52
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
17.4.8 All firing of indirect fire weapons will be from positions in which the site to mask allows
engagement of the targets nearest to the forward line of troops. Selection of firing positions, direction of
fire, and fall of shot must prevent the projectiles from striking trees or other obstacles in the area from the
weapon position to a point forward of unprotected personnel. The forward point is defined as the bursting
radius of the round, plus 12 probable errors.
17.4.9 When field artillery is fired during CALFEX/CAX with maneuvering personnel, the impact area
will be adjusted according to the maneuver location of troops to maintain safe separation distance. The
troop side of the impact area will be determined in relation to the movement of the personnel.
Unprotected troops must not be permitted to enter SDZ areas A, B, C, and E after firing has commenced.
17.4.10 Weapons will be grouped by muzzle velocity as cited in FM 6–40 or pertinent Marine Corps
TMs. Weapons will be bore-sighted as prescribed in FM 6–50. Tubes will be clean and dry before start of
exercise and will be cleaned during the exercise in accordance with appropriate weapon TMs.
17.4.11 All ammunition to be fired should be uniformly conditioned to ambient temperature consistent
with the tactical situation.
17.4.12 Registration.
a) At least two rounds should be fired for registration. Targets should be selected in the central
portion of the target area. After registration, corrections must be applied to deflection and quadrant
elevation limits. If no registration is fired, meteorological and velocity error (MET + VE) corrections will be
applied immediately before the exercise starts.
b) To compensate for drift, in high-angle fire the right deflection limit will be moved to the left by the
amount of the maximum drift listed within the range limits for the charges being fired. The left limit will be
moved to the right by the amount of the minimum drift listed within the range limits for the charges being
fired. To determine the appropriate drift, the tabular firing table and graphical firing scale must be
examined and the safer value used. If a drift value is not listed in the tabular firing table or on the
graphical firing scale for the ranges to the near and far edge of the target area, the nearest safer value
will be used.
17.4.13 Overhead fire above unprotected personnel from a moving vehicle or aircraft is prohibited.
17.4.14 Cannon and mortar flanking fire must not impact any closer to unprotected personnel than the
fragmentation radius (area A) prescribed for each weapon.
17.4.15 Small arms (5.56 mm, 7.62 mm, and .50 caliber), ground-mounted or vehicle-mounted
machineguns may be fired at low angles of elevation (near the flank of an individual or unit.) However,
there must be an angle of 15° or more between the limit of fire and the near flank of the closest individual
or unit and all impacts are beyond the individual or unit. Traversing and depression stops will be provided
on machineguns to maintain the required angle and distance between the line of fire and the near flank of
an individual or unit.
17.4.16 Range SOPs will address firing and maneuver unit locations to ensure no unprotected
personnel are exposed to training fires.
17.5 FIRE CONTROL
17.5.1 The unit commander makes the final decisions on fire control measures. The following
conditions must be met:
a) The ammunition in (1) through (6) below may be authorized for use in live-fire exercises only when
it is fired into designated (dedicated high hazard) impact areas through which personnel are not permitted
to maneuver:
1) 40-mm HE
2) 66-mm light antitank weapon (HE)
3) Hand grenades (HE)
4) RAAWS/MAAWS (HE & HEAT)
5) 25-mm (HE)
6) M74 66-mm TPA
b) Final coordination lines must be identified to all participating units.
c) Weapons used in live-fire exercises will be controlled so that SDZ areas (such as A, B, C, E, and
F) do not overlap areas in which unprotected personnel are maneuvering.
d) A RSO will directly supervise and control the throwing of fragmentation grenades. The following
procedures apply.
1) Hand fragmentation grenades may be thrown during LFXs. Hand grenades will be carried in
accordance with FM 3-23-20. The fragmentation characteristics of the grenades must be considered and
appropriate safety precautions taken to include the following:
(a) Impact areas will be free of obstacles (such as trees, thick vegetation, tank hulls, deep snow,
or standing water).
53
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
(b) A minimum side-to-side distance of 5 m between each individual during the throwing exercise
is required.
(c) Throwing positions will protect the throwers from fragments.
(d) EOD personnel will destroy dud grenades in place or safe and remove before troops enter
the grenade impact area. If EOD personnel are unable to locate or destroy any dud grenades, troop
maneuver through the impact area is not authorized.
2) Individuals being transported by vehicle or aircraft will not carry fragmentation, offensive, or
white phosphorus grenades attached to web equipment.
17.6 MANEUVER IN TEMPORARY IMPACT AREAS
17.6.1 The installation commander may approve maneuver through temporary impact areas containing
unexploded munitions.
17.6.2 The installation commander may approve maneuver through temporary impact areas after
reviewing a Composite Risk Management Worksheet (DA Form 7566) and accepting residual risks. The
following munitions, although not identified in paragraph 18-5.a., may present high or extremely high risk
if present.
a) 20-mm HE
b) 30-mm HE
c) All HEAT ammunition, because of type of fuze action and sensitivity
d) All ordnance fuzed with mechanical time fuzes
17.7 AIR SUPPORT
17.7.1 During live-fire exercises, the following control measures are required prior to firing aircraftmounted weapons or dropping air-delivered ordnance:
a) Positive identification of personnel locations
b) Positive identification of targets
c) Positive clearance to fire as given by the controlling ground or airborne forward air controller
17.7.2 Attack flight paths and access corridors will be known and visually verified by ground personnel
and participating aircrews.
17.7.3 Direct communications will be established and maintained between the OIC, the forward air
controller, the FDC, and Range Control.
17.8 TRAINING UNIT’S RESPONSIBILITIES: Units desiring to conduct a live-fire exercise will comply
with the procedures indicated below:
17.8.1 NLT 90 days in advance of firing, the unit will submit the following to Range Control:
a) Appointed OIC and RSO for LFX with unit POC. The OIC must be a field grade officer or higher,
for a battalion or larger CALFEX.
b) Concept of Operation
c) Requested LFX areas
d) Types of weapons, ammunition, smoke, chemicals, and pyrotechnics
e) Target system support. Refer to Appendix C of TC 7-9.
f) Safety issues or concerns that effect the LFX
17.8.2 NLT 90 days prior to firing, Range Control requires a detailed OPLAN with the following
information:
a) A detailed scenario (which includes sketches and/or overlays) that defines the scheme of
maneuver, and the integration of supporting fires.
b) Coordination lines, or checkpoints, to identify maneuver limits.
c) Limits of fire for each element and/or weapon Surface Danger Zone.
d) Specific controls for firing while moving.
e) Communication and control measures.
f) Safety Checklist. Refer to Appendix A of TC 7-9 for an example.
g) Risk Management Worksheet. Refer to Appendix A of TC 7-9, and Appendix B of this regulation.
17.8.3 NLT 72 hours prior to any LFX/CALFEX, the OIC will conduct a walk-through of the LFX terrain
with the RCO or NCOIC.
17.8.4 Prior to the LFX/CALFEX, the OIC will obtain copies of the approved Surface Danger Zone from
Range Control, stating established safety limits for all weapons to be used in the LFXCALFEX.
17.8.5 Unit Commanders will brief participants on the capabilities of the weapons used by the other
components of the exercise.
54
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
17.9 RANGE CONTROL’S RESPONSIBILITIES
17.9.1 The Post Commander has final approval for all LFX and CALFEX conducted at Camp Ripley.
17.9.2 Assist the unit OIC in developing SDZs.
17.9.3 Review of detailed OPLAN for safety considerations.
17.9.4 Preparation of targetry systems and ranges.
17.9.5 Upon request, provide copies of past LFX/CALFEX scenarios conducted on Camp Ripley that
include safety checklists and Composite Risk Management Worksheet (DA Form 7566) worksheets.
17.9.6 Upon receipt and review of information the RCO or NCOIC will notify the unit POC within five
working days, to schedule an initial discussion of the LFX/CALFEX plan.
17.10 CHANGES IN LFX/CALFEX SCENARIOS: Any changes prior to, or during, the LFX will be
requested only by the range OIC, and approved by the RCO or NCOIC.
17.11 INFANTRY PLATOON BATTLE COURSE (IPBC): The IPBC consists of a Practice Lane and two
Maneuver Lanes (Light and Heavy), with Trench and Bunker systems within each lane. The range
supports squad through company size elements, with Armor/Mech support. It can also be incorporated
into a CALFEX.
17.11.1 General
a) All safety measures listed in paragraphs 17.2 and 17.5, and in the Range SOP, must be adhered
to.
b) All weapons firing within the trenches will be done in a westerly direction. No live grenades or
anti-armor weapons will be used to engage the bunkers and trenches.
c) Ammunition personnel must ensure that blank ammunition is kept separated from live ammunition
when issuing ammunition.
d) Motorola Talk-About walkie-talkies are available from Range Control, for internal range
communications.
e) Unit must open/close the range through Range Control via their primary form of communication,
preferably SINCGARS radio.
17.11.2 Additional Information
a) An Open-Air Classroom is located at UM 927215. This is west of the Trout Pond on Livorno Trail.
b) Ammunition Supply Point will be in the same area.
c) Barrier 40 will be in the Down-Not-Locked status for unit entrance point. Using unit must have a
road guard at Barrier 40 once the range is in the Open status. Road guard must have communications
with the range OIC.
d) The range OIC, RSO, Senior Observer Controller (SOC), Squad OC, and Weapon OC will attend
a Range Control Safety Briefing prior to opening the range.
17.12 CONVOY LIVE FIRE EXERCISE (LFX)
17.12.1 NOTE: DUE TO BATWING SDZ RESTRICTIONS AND CURRENT TARGET LOCATIONS,
WEAPONS FIRING FOR .50 CAL AND 7.62MM ARE LIMITED TO CERTAIN TARGET AREAS.
TARGET SCENARIOS WILL BE APPROVED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS, DEPENDENT ON THE
FIELD TRAINING AREA, OPTEMPO, AND THE TARGET SCENARIO REQUESTED BY THE UNIT.
17.12.2 This range provides, under controlled conditions, a live-fire exercise for patrol size elements
conducting convoy operations. The lane is approximately 5 kilometers in length, located on Cassino
Road. It offers five target engagement areas with 83 possible target locations, and a guardrail checkpoint
area. There is a basic target set-up on the range. See the CLFX Range description page in TAB A and
the CLFX SOP for target locations.
17.12.3 Unit requests the CLFX NLT 90 days prior to range usage, utilizing ATS Form 23.
17.12.4 Unit submits OPLAN and Composite Risk Management Worksheet (DA Form 7566) to Range
Control NLT 90 days prior to range usage.
17.12.5 Unit must submit a copy of the scenario and target layout if different than the target layout
already setup on the range to Range Control NLT 30 days prior to range usage.
17.12.6 Range Assembly Area is located in TA 58. Road Barriers 42 and 46 will be Down-Not-Locked
for entering and exiting the lane. Road Guards will be in position at both barriers prior to opening the
range.
17.12.7 Unit will open/close the range through Range Control, utilizing RC Form 39 (Convoy Live Fire
Lane Opening/Closing Checklist).
55
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
17.12.8 The range OIC will have continuous communications with Range Control (primary frequency is
SINCGARS 36.100, alternate frequency is 36.900), with each vehicle (Motorola Talk-About radios) in an
iteration, and with the road guards at Barriers 42 and 46. There is an OE254 Antenna located beside the
Tin Shed on the CLFX Range Assembly Area.
17.12.9 Range RSO must ensure that all weapon safety-limiting devices are in place prior to start of
exercise.
17.12.10 Using unit will need the following range support staff:
a) Range OIC (E-7 and above)
b) Range RSO (E-6 and above)
c) Vehicle Commander/Safety Observer (One for each vehicle in iteration)
d) Script Reader/RTO
e) Medic- must have Aid Bag, vehicle with operational radio, and a litter
f) Ammunition NCO
g) Two personnel for Ammo Detail
h) Four road guards-two for Barrier 42, two for Barrier 46
17.12.11 For additional range and safety information, reference the CLFX SOP located in the Range
Packet and at Range Control.
17.13 REFERENCES
17.13.1 Chapter 17, DA Pamphlet 385-63 Range Safety
17.13.2 TC 7-9 Infantry Live Fire Training
17.13.3 CLFX SOP, dated 31 MAY 2005
17.13.4 All weapon systems FMs and TMs utilized in the LFX/CALFEX
56
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Chapter 18 Environmental Management
18.1 GENERAL: For information on environmental management, the Environmental Office (320- 6162722/2719/2720) or Range Control (320-616-3137/3135) has leader/soldier handbooks and field cards
are available for soldiers and units.
18.2 LIMITED USE AREAS
18.2.1 A universal marking system (Siebert Stakes) marks all Limited Use Areas on Camp Ripley. The
“Siebert Stake” has alternating Red and Amber reflective tape that is Night Vision Device compatible.
18.2.2 The areas marked with Siebert Stakes include, but are not limited to:
a) Culturally protected areas
b) Historic Fort Ripley
c) Closed Dump sites
d) Threatened/Endangered species habitat
e) Training hazards
18.2.3 The Camp Ripley 1:25,000 map displays the Limited Use areas in the field training area. Units
should review the map prior to training and plan accordingly. Maps are available at Range Control or by
contacting the Training Area Coordinator at (320)616-3135.
18.3 RESTRICTIONS ON FIRING WHITE PHOSPHORUS
18.3.1 Firing of White Phosphorus ammunition into the sensitive wetland areas within the
HENDRICKSON and LEACH Impact Areas is prohibited.
18.3.2 White Phosphorus will not be fired directly into, or within 100-meters, or have airburst directly
over, wetland areas. The sensitive areas, including the 100-meter buffer, are identified on maps located
in the Environmental and Range Control Offices, and are included in the Range Packets.
18.4 FIELD WATER POINTS: Camp Ripley has designated three areas for establishing and operating
field water points, that are intended to support troops in training for field showers, laundry, and potable
water.
1
Crow Wing River
UM 926295
2
Mississippi River Rest Area 3
UM 939091
3
Ferrell Lake SE Corner
UM 908072
Crow Wing and Mississippi Rivers are
Designated Zebra Mussel infested by MN DNR
18.4.1 All water points must be cleared through Range Control. To initiate the approval process, units
must submit a written request, including unit name, address, telephone number, and type of water point
operation including potable water, shower, and/or laundry points, with the preferred location.
18.4.2 The designated water points are equipped with a crushed rock drain field for disposing of
wastewater generated at the water point. Wastewater includes backwash water from water purification,
and gray water from laundry and shower activities. Supply and Services (3128) issue the PVC piping for
waste water disposal drain field.
18.4.3 Un-established Water points used by units not hauling their potable water off site must also
follow the same approval procedures. However, environmental standards for locating these water points
will limit water points of this nature. The standards include a 100 meter setback from lakes, streams,
wetlands, and historic sites. Furthermore, wastewater discharge must be mixed with purified water to it’s
original concentration and shall be applied to land surface using the plastic drain field pipe.
18.4.4 Crow Wing River site (UM 939283) is a permanent, self-sufficient electrical pump operated
potable water point. This site is used to draw water only.
18.4.5 It is illegal to transport unpurified water (filtered 40 microns or greater) from infested waters,
Mississippi and Crow Wing Rivers, except by DNR permit.
18.4.6 Water treated with greater than a 40-micron filter may not be discharged where it can run into
another basin, another river, or a drain system that does not go to a treatment facility.
18.4.7 Ensuring that equipment is clean is critical to limiting the spread of invasive species. Any
equipment used to treat Mississippi or Crow Wing River water must be treated by one of the following
means prior to use in another water body:
18.4.8 Power spray equipment to remove dirt, mud, or vegetation. Scraping may be necessary if
objects were in the water for extended periods, or
57
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
a) Dry 3 days in temperatures over 65 F. Drying is NOT recommended in cool wet weather (< 65 F.).
b) Wash with 104 F. water for 4 minutes (hotter temps result in better and shorter kill times), or
c) Freeze for 2 days, or
d) Treat water with 750mg/l KCL for 1 hour, followed by 25 mg/l formalin for 2 hours to kill zebra
mussel veligers.
18.5 FIRE CONTROL PROCEDURES
18.5.1 There shall be no fires started without the permission of Range Control.
18.5.2 When wild fires are started because of range firing, Range Control will be notified immediately
by the responsible unit. Unit personnel will standby to assist Range Control with the fire suppression
efforts, if necessary.
18.5.3 The unit will report the following information to Range Control:
a) The location of the fire by range designation, grid, or road reference.
b) Whether or not sufficient personnel and equipment are available to extinguish the fire.
c) Wildland fires in signed impact areas will be reported and monitored. No unit personnel will enter
signed impact areas.
d) Fire danger status will be posted on a sign immediately adjacent to E gate outside the Range
Control Office. It will also be posted on the Range Bulletin.
FIRE DANGER CODE
GREEN
YELLOW
RED
Moderate
Use normal caution. Fire will start easily. Any type of ammunition may
be used with care. Smoking is permitted.
High
Use extra caution. Fire will start very easily. The beginning of the high
danger period. Any type of ammunition may be used, with care, on
ranges and within impact areas. It is recommended that the use of
pyrotechnics, demolitions, and heat or flame-producing devices within
training areas be limited as much as possible to cleared areas or areas
previously burned for that purpose.
Extreme
Flash condition. This is the highest class of fire danger. Fires started
are practically impossible to extinguish and usually continue until danger
rating conditions improve or they burn themselves out. The utmost
caution with fire producing agents and devices must be exercised at all
times. The firing of high explosives, pyrotechnics, incendiaries, or other
ammunition likely to cause fires is prohibited unless specifically
authorized by Range Control.
18.6 HISTORICAL PRESERVATION
18.6.1 Camp Ripley has numerous areas of historical or archaeological significance. The majority of
these sites have been located and marked. Many of these areas are off limits to all troops. Caution
should be maintained when operating near known areas. At no time shall deliberate destruction take
place at sites of historical or archaeological significance.
18.6.2 Any individual finding an artifact or item of historical or archeological significance is required by
law and policy to not touch or disturb. Record the location and contact Range Control to initiate the
process of determination, if any artifacts are found.
18.6.3 Digging, and tracked vehicle maneuvers, is prohibited within 100 meters of a historical or
archaeological site.
18.7 NOISE MONITORING: Noise is inherent to the operation of Camp Ripley. Of course, with noise, the
surrounding communities may be impacted or annoyed. As a result, Camp Ripley Operations Office
responds to all noise complaints, and maintains a record of all complaints.
18.7.1 Electric generators in support of training activities produce considerable noise. When
generators are located within 500 meters of the Camp boundaries, digging in or sand bagging will reduce
noise levels.
18.7.2 Current noise abatement policy prohibits unnecessary over-flying of populated areas at altitudes
lower than 1,000 feet AGL
18.7.3 In addition, the following noise sensitive areas shall be avoided whenever possible:
a) Post Headquarters-located at the south end of the airfield.
b) VIP Quarters (Valhalla)-located on the West side of the airfield.
c) Green Prairie Fish Lake
58
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
d) Lake Alexander
e) Crow Wing Lake
f) All Turkey farms, directly north of the R4301 area.
g) Round Lake and Three Fingers Lake
h) Area towns and cities
i) The Brainerd Lakes Area, Northwest of the City of Brainerd.
j) Mississippi River adjacent to Camp Ripley, below 1,500 feet MSL.
18.8 FIELD FUEL STORAGE/BLADDERS: Camp Ripley has identified 10 areas approved for installing
field fuel storage bladders exceeding 1,000 gallons in capacity. Emplacement of bladders in locations
other than those approved is prohibited, unless special provisions are requested and granted by the
Environmental Office.
18.8.1 Units proposing to install field fuel storage bladders in approved, or unapproved areas, will
submit a written request in advance. The request must include: name, address, and phone number of the
unit; amount and type of fuel to be dispensed; number/volume of fuel bladders to be installed; dates of
operation; preferred location on Camp Ripley; and the unit point of contact.
18.8.2 The following guidance pertains to the installation and operation of field fuel storage bladders:
a) The site will not be located within 100 meters of any lake, stream, wetlands, or historical site.
b) The site will not be located within 200 meters of the Mississippi and Crow Wing rivers.
c) Preparation of the site, underlying the fuel bladder, will require excavating the topsoil to provide a
level site, and to ensure that all debris is cleared that might otherwise puncture the flexible storage
container.
d) A continuous berm, surrounding the storage site, will be constructed using on-site soils. The
dimensions of the bermed area should not be less than the total capacity of the fuel storage bladder
located within the area. The bermed area must be lined with an impervious material to act as a
secondary containment, in case of any failure or seepage from the storage container. This material is
issued through the Logistics Division, Camp Ripley, (320) 616-3128/3130.
e) The area designated for conveying the fuel (i.e., hoses, piping, etc.) must be underlain with an
impermeable liner.
f) Range Control, or Environmental Office personnel will conduct daily inspections of the site.
18.9 MOBILE POL DISTRIBUTION POINTS: POL distribution from mobile units is an activity that has the
potential of posing environmental concerns; therefore, the following guidance is provided to prevent any
negative impacts:
18.9.1 The proposed location of distribution points should be coordinated with Range Control.
18.9.2 Use drip pans at all times for the dispensing nozzles, and the dispensing area should be lined
with a small piece of impermeable liner such as plastic or an old fuel bladder.
18.9.3 Ensure that the fueling hose is drained into the drip pan after each fueling operation and hang
the hoses with the nozzle pointed up.
18.9.4 Provide empty drums for accumulating POL contaminated soil in the event of small spills. The
drums should be labeled “POL Contaminated Soil.” These drums can be obtained at the Logistics
Division, Bldg. 2-207.
18.9.5 Empty containers should be available to accumulate contaminated/waste fuels. One container
for each type of fuel and the containers should be labeled accordingly. These containers are available
from the POL Tank Farm. Contaminated fuels will be turned in to the Camp Ripley POL Office, Bldg. 1799, (320) 616-3001.
18.9.6 Each POL distribution point should be equipped with a spill kit in the event of a spill. The kit
should include absorbent materials, shovel and plastic storage bags.
18.10 MECHANICAL DIGGING: Digging or earth excavation requires written approval from the Range
Control Office. Request will include type and grid location of excavation with time and duration to be
used. Range Control will approve permits with concurrence from the Department of Public Works (DPW)
to ensure facilities (above and below ground) are not affected. The request will also be coordinated with
the environmental office.
18.10.1 Mechanical digging is permitted in the training areas, except for the following restrictions:
a) Signed tree plantations
b) 100 meters from historical sites
c) 100 meters from surface water or wetlands
d) Active logging sites
e) 50 meters from main roads
59
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
f) 200 meters from the Mississippi River
18.10.2 Maps with all above listed areas identified are available at Range Control, Bldg. 24-199, 320616-3137/6015.
18.11 VEGETATION
18.11.1 Units are encouraged to select locations that have sufficient natural concealment. This will
minimize the need to cut vegetation for camouflage. However, it is permissible to utilize natural
vegetation as deemed necessary for concealing vehicles, gun emplacements, and fortifications. The
following restrictions apply:
a) Use native hardwood species (oak, maple, aspen, ironwood, hazel brush, etc.) that are less than
two inches in diameter.
b) Do not cut evergreens (pine, spruce, tamarack, red cedar, etc.) unless special permission is
granted through Camp Ripley Range Control Office.
18.11.2 Larger timbers may be needed for fortification. It is permissible to utilize any dead or down
trees throughout the training area. In addition, telephone poles may be requested from the Department of
Public Works-Roads and Railroads Division. Contact Range Control to initiate the request.
60
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB A
RANGE DESCRIPTIONS
1
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Range and Training Overview
Camp Ripley has some of the nation’s most modern ranges. The post can accommodate most
weapon systems organic to a heavy brigade.
A-Range Complex
The A-Range Complex allows commanders flexibility during zero and qualification of individual
weapons. The complex includes the following ranges (all within walking distance):
 All weather classrooms
 Zero and Known Distance Ranges
 Automated Rifle and Pistol Ranges
 7-station MOUT range (with sewer trainer)
 23-station Confidence Course
 Rappel Tower
 M320 Range
 Practice Hand Grenade Lane
 Hand Grenade Qualification Course
 Land Navigation Course
 EFMB Litter Obstacle Course
 Live Fire Facility (Shoot House)
 Field Leader Reaction Course
Miller Complex
Camp Ripley has grouped four major ranges (East Range, Center Range, West Range, and North
Range, along with M-COFT pad sites) into the Miller Complex. The ranges offer training from individual to
platoon level collective tasks. The ranges provide for training of Tank and BFV crews on their respective
Gunnery Tables I-XII. The Miller Complex provides for a logical progression and maximum throughput
capacity. The Complex allows two battalions to fulfill gunnery requirements during a typical Annual
Training of two weeks duration. This Complex provides battle courses for use of live fire or Multiple
Integrated Engagement System (MILES) during Situational Training Exercise (STX) of Field Training
Exercises (FTX). These exercises train squads through company/team level units on collective tasks in
state-of-the-art simulated combat environments. The location of these ranges greatly facilitates their use
for gunnery while allowing suitable area for multiple company size lanes training. The Complex can also
be integrated into all FTX scenarios on other portions of the training area.
Training Areas
The Field Training Area (FTA) is divided into 78 separate Training Areas. The Training Areas provide
a variety of terrain and vegetation. Camp Ripley’s terrain will meet the needs of Mechanized Forces,
Light Forces, Support Units, and Special Forces.
Special Operations
Since Camp Ripley has the Mississippi River and the Crow Wing River as boundaries, special
operations units have more freedom to set up training scenarios, including live-fire exercises. The post
has surveyed drop zones, numerous water training areas, and has no civilian roads or dwellings in the
FTA.
Range Map Disclaimer
The range maps in this Appendix are not to scale. They are included for reference purposes only.
Contact Range Control for scaled range maps.
2
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
A-1
A-2
A-3
A-4
A-5
A-6
A-7
A-9
A-10
A-11
A-12
A-13
A-14
A-15
ARNO DZ
B-1
B-2
B-2
SHOOTHOUSE
B-3
B-4
B-5
B-6
B-7
B-8
BENNET HILL
BREACH
C
C1 IED
Range_IED
CACTF
CENTER
(CRG)
CLFX
CTF
UM 91980857
UM 92460867
UM 92310857
UM 91410857
UM 91140857
UM 92430857
UM 92540846
UM 91610857
UM 91850857
UM 90930853
UM 92630868
UM 92260808
UM 92700872
UM 92540803
UM 88112524
UM 92581646
UM 92581709
D
UM 93601202
DEMO-1
DEMO-2
DEMO-3
DEMO-4
DEMO-5
DEMO-6
DT-1
DT-2
DT-3
EAST
(ERG)
F
UM 92581709
Established Ranges
Small Arms Known Distance Range/25m Zero Range-32 Firing Points
Combat Pistol Qualification Range (CPQR)-15 Firing Points
Automatic Record Fire (ARF) Range-16 Firing Points
Automated Field Fire (AFF) Range-16 Firing Points
Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT) Assault Course
Confidence Obstacle Site
Rappel Tower and Practice Tower
M320/M320 Grenade Launcher Range-5 Firing Points
Hand Grenade Qualification Course and Practice Lane
Ferrell Lake Navigation Course
25 meter Zero Range-32 Firing Points
EFMB Litter Obstacle Course
Live Fire Facility (Shoot House)
Field Leader Reaction Course
Air Drop Zone
25 meter Zero Range-32 Firing Points
25 meter Zero Range-32 Firing Points
Military Operations on Urbanized Terrain (MOUT) Assault building
UM 92451375
UM 95420691
UM 94170699
UM 94170827
UM 93100695
UM 94180746
UM 93520879
UM 92081586
UM 92550794
Gettysburg Road Land Navigation Course
Mounted Land Navigation Course
Land Navigation Course
Engineer Dig Site
Land Navigation Course
Tactical Mine Lane
3 Ski Runs/1 Tubing Run with Tow Rope
Live-Fire Exercise Breach Facility
NBC Course
UM 92550794
IED Lane
UM 92560768
UM 91321336
UM 91851580
UM 87841521
UM 90342588
UM 90092733
UM 90782840
UM 91750694
UM 87691185
UM 91151336
Combined Arms Collective Training Facility (MOUT)
Multi-Purpose Machine Gun (MPMG)- 6 Lanes (Lanes 1 and 6
equipped with 1500m targets)
Convoy Live Fire Exercise
Collective Training Facility (MOUT)
Shotgun/Short Range Marksmanship Range: South Firing Line=40
Firing Points/North Firing Line=20 Firing Points
M Range Field Demolitions Site
OP-2 Field Demolitions Site
TA40 Field Demolitions Site
SEAL CABIN Field Demolitions Site
Light Demolitions Range
TA75 Field Demolitions Site
Tracked/Wheeled Vehicle Driver Training Course
Tracked/Wheeled Vehicle Driver Training Course
Tracked/Wheeled Vehicle Driver Training Course
UM 90201263
Multi-Purpose Training Range (MPTR)
UM 90900944
Biathlon Course-31 Firing Points/25 meter Zero Range-29 Firing
Points/Tactical Training Base
UM 88391347
UM 92722308
UM 93990695
3
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Established Ranges
FARP
F&M-1
(Fire and
Movement)
F&M-2
(Fire and
Movement)
HGR
IED Lane_IED
IPBC
ISBC
J
K
L
UM 87041108
Forward Area Refueling Point
UM 92151916
Fire and Movement Range
UM 93361119
Fire and Movement Range
UM 90721423
UM 96142713
UM 92752139
UM 88272886
UM 90881469
UM 91172312
UM 90721423
M
UM 91421336
MK-19
NORTH
(NRG)
NRG ECP
OP-1
OP-2
OP-7
OP-15
OP-16
OP-19
OP-23
R
RIPLEY DZ
SEAL Cabin
Scaled Range
UM 92362310
UAC
UM 92581674
W-1
W-2
WEST
(WRG)
Y-1
Y-2 EAST
Y-2 WEST
Y-4
UM 90320767
UM 93631237
Hand Grenade Range (Live Grenade Familiarization)
IED-Defeat Lane
Infantry Platoon Battle Course
Under new construction for Infantry Squad Battle Course
Multi-Purpose Field Fire Range (200m Firing Line)
Multi-Purpose Field Fire Range
Demolitions Range
Mortar Short Range Training Round (SRTR) Range-4 Firing Points/25m
Zero-32 Firing Points
MK-19 Multi-Purpose Gunnery Range (40mm TP ONLY)
Multi-Purpose Machine Gun Range(MPMG); 6 Lanes (lanes 2-5
equipped with 1500m targets)
Entry Control Point (ECP) Trainer Lane
Observation Point
Observation Point/Mortar Firing Point
MK-19 40 mm HE/Mortar Point/Observation Point
Observation Point
Observation Point/Mortar Point
Observation Point/Mortar Point
MK-19 40 mm HE/Mortar Point/Observation Point
Vehicle Recovery Site
Air Drop Zone
Non-Standard Small Arms Range
Scaled Vehicle Mounted Weapon Systems Course
Urban Assault Course-Station 3 is the Grenadier Gunnery Trainer
(40mm TP ONLY) and single person Fire & Maneuver Lane (5.56mm)
Ferrell Lake Pontoon Bridge Site
Mississippi River Ribbon Bridge Site
Under new construction for Multi-Purpose Machine Gun
Range/Heavy Sniper Lane
POW Camp/Tactical Training Base
Tactical Training Base
Tactical Training Base
Tactical Training Base
UM 9251645
UM 93051675
UM 90991464
UM 91961560
UM 90011505
UM 91382310
UM 90132467
UM 91332773
UM 92742384
UM 92040551
UM 90911381
UM 90322612
UM 95300602
UM 86551350
UM 93770696
UM 90260616
UM 90060538
UM 95462646
4
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
A-1
KNOWN DISTANCE AND 25M ZERO RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 921087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
25M ZERO RANGE: PORTABLE TARGET STANDS
KNOWN DISTANCE RANGE: FIRING LINES ARE AT 100, 200, 300, 400,
500, 600, AND 1000 YARDS. TARGET PITS INCLUDE PUSH-UP, PULLDOWN SLIDING TARGET FRAME LIFTERS. REFLEXIVE FIRE CAN ALSO
BE PERFORMED ON THIS RANGE.
SHOTGUN THROUGH .50 Cal.
COORDINATED BY UNIT WITH RANGE CONTROL, AS REQURIED BY
WEAPON SYSTEM, COURSE, AND DISTANCE BEING FIRED
KD RANGE: 32 POINTS ON ALL FIRING LINES, EXECPT THE 1000 YD
LINE, WHICH HAS 10.
25M ZERO: 32 POINT PEA ROCK LINE
353 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES-PITS SHED AND 25M ZERO SHED
NO
YES-40 PERSON CAPACITY (NO INDOOR LATRINE FACILITIES)
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AT BARRIERS #1 AND #2 ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD, WHEN FIRING 5001000 YARD LINES. ROAD GUARDS MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE
RANGE OIC.
IF A-3 RANGE IS OCCUPIED, FIRING WILL BE FROM THE 25M ZERO
LINE ONLY. 300-1000 YARD LINES CLOSE A-3 RANGE. 500-1000 YD
FIRING LINE USAGE INTERMITTENTLY CLOSES CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
7.62MM MATCH GRADE AMMO CLOSES NORMANDY ROAD.
WHEN SCHEDULING THIS RANGE FOR KD FIRING, UNITS SHOULD
ALSO SCHEDULE A-3 AS A NON-LIVE FIRE RANGE, TO AVOID USAGE
CONFLICTS BETWEEN BOTH RANGES.
PAPER TARGETS MUST BE REMOVED FROM THE LIFTER TARGET
FRAMES AFTER USE.
THE 500 YD LINE IS THE SOUTH SHOULDER OF CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
THERE IS NO PARKING ALLOWED ALONG THE EAST SIDE OF THE
RANGE ROAD.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR
TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING
TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT
TRASH RECEPTACLES.
5
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
6
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
A-1 SOUTH
SHOTGUN/.22 CAL. RIFLE/ARCHERY
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 921087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS IS A SMALL WEAPON FAMILIARIZATION RANGE ONLY
ALL SHOTGUN; .22 CAL. RIFLE; ARCHERY
COORDINATED BY UNIT WITH RANGE CONTROL, AS REQURIED
BY WEAPON SYSTEM.
OIC LINES-UP FIRERS PARALLEL TO CHAMPAGNE ROAD,
WITHIN THE ENDS OF THE A-1 600YD LINE BERM
180 DEG MAG
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
ON A-1
NO
YES-40 PERSON CAPACITY (NO LATRINE FACILITIES)
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
LAY-OUT RANGE FLAG ON HOOD OF A VEHICLE THAT WILL BE
LOCATED AT THE RANGE BOUNDARY TRAIL AND CHAMPAGNE
ROAD INTERSECTION.
IT IS SUGGESTED THAT AN ARSO OBSERVE THE RANGE
BOUNDARY TRAIL TO ENSURE THAT NO ONE BREACHES THE
BARRIERS CLOSING OFF THIS RANGE, ESPECIALLY FROM THE
SOUTH.
THIS RANGE CLOSES A-1 KD RANGE 600 YD AND 1000 YD
FIRING LINES.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
7
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
8
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
A-2
COMBAT PISTOL QUALIFICATION RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 925087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPUTER SCORED RANGE. EACH LANE CONSISTS HAS 7
AUTOMATED TARGETS. THESE TARGETS ARE AT 10, 13, 16, 17,
23, 27, AND 31 METERS. NON-STANDARD REFLEXIVE FIRING
CAN BE PERFORMED ON THE RANGE AS WELL.
PISTOL AND 5.56MM
PERMANENTLY INSTALLED TARGET LIFTERS
15 STATIONARY FIRING POINTS ARE PAINTED ON THE
ASPHALT FIRING LINE
350 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
YES
NO-CAN UTILIZE A-3 OR A-12 CLASSROOMS, IF AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TOWER FIELD PHONE: 7512
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
COMPUTER SCENARIO CHANGES MUST BE REQUESTED
THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS NLT 72 HOURS
PRIOR TO USAGE.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS, CALL ATS, PHONE # 3132/3133.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
9
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
10
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
A-3
AUTOMATED RECORD FIRE RANGE
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
UM 923087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPUTER SCORED RANGE. EACH LANE HAS 6 AUTOMATED
TARGETS. ONLY THE RIGHT-HAND 50M TARGET IS AVAILABLE.
FURTHEST TARGET IS AT 300M. THIS RANGE HAS DAY AND
NIGHT FIRE CAPABILITY.
PISTOLS-7.62MM BALL. 7.62MM BALL AUTHORIZED ON LANES
1-11 ONLY.
PERMANENTLY INSTALLED TARGET LIFTERS
FIRING LINE
16 CONCRETE STANDING AND PRONE POSITIONS
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
357 DEGREES MAGNETIC
RIGHT LIMIT
ORANGE POLE
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
LATRINE FACILITIES
COVERED MESS
TARGET BLDG
YES- INSIDE CLASSROOMS
YES: FACILITY # 14206
NO
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
YES
CLASSROOM
YES-2: NAMED A-302E AND 302-W. 40-PERSON CAPACITY
EACH. USAGE OF THE WEST CLASSROOM IS INCLUDED WITH
THE RANGE RESERVATION.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
DESCRIPTION
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
GREEN POLE
TOWER FIELD PHONE: 7511
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NEXT TO THE AMMUNITION BUILDING
N/A
COMPUTER SCENARIO CHANGES MUST BE REQUESTED
THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS NLT 72 HOURS
PRIOR TO USAGE. THIS RANGE CANNOT BE OCCUPIED IF A-1
PITS (KD) IS RESERVED.
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, PHONE # 3132/3133.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
11
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
12
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
A-4
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
COVERED MESS
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
AUTOMATED RECORD FIRE RANGE
UM 915087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
EACH LANE HAS 6 TARGETS FROM 50-300M. ONLY THE RIGHTHAND 50M TARGET IS AVAILABLE. TARGET HITS ARE
COMPUTER SCORED WITH PRINTOUT. THIS RANGE HAS DAY
AND NIGHT FIRE CAPABILITY.
PISTOLS THROUGH 7.62MM BALL. 7.62MM BALL AUTHORIZED
ON LANES 6-9 ONLY.
PERMANENT TARGET LIFTERS. PORTABLE TARGET STANDS
ARE AVAILABLE FOR NON-AUTOMATED RANGE USAGE.
16 FIRING POINTS WITH CONCRETE PITS AND PRONE
POSITIONS
30 DEGREES MAGNETIC
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
YES-IN CLASSROOM
YES: FACILITY # 14207
NO
YES
YES-30 PERSON CAPACITY
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TOWER FIELD PHONE: 7510
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
COMPUTER SCENARIO CHANGES MUST BE REQUESTED
THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS NLT 72 HRS PRIOR
TO RANGE USAGE.
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, PHONE # 3132/3133.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
13
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
14
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
RESTRICTIONS
A-5
MOUT ASSAULT COURSE
UM 912087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 6 BUILDING STRUCTURES AND A STORM
SEWER TRAINER. EACH STRUCTURE HAS ITS OWN TRAINING
PURPOSE.
BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, PYROTECHNICS, CS, AND TEAR GAS.
N/A
NONE
N/A
N/A
N/A
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
N/A
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED FOR
SIMUNITIONS AND GAS GUNS ONLY. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
OIC AND RSO ARE REQUIRED FOR BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, AND
GAS. MUST BE ON WEAPON SAFETY CERTIFICATION
MEMORANDUM AND HAVE A CURRENT RANGE SAFETY
BRIEFING. ALL OTHERS USE BLANK AMMUNITION ONLY!
HC SMOKE IS NOT ALLOWED ON THE RANGE. SMOKE OR CS
OF ANY KIND IS NOT ALLOWED IN ANY BUILDINGS.
REMARKS
USE OF FLASH BANGS ON THE WALLS OR FLOORS WILL BE
DETERMINED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS.
SIMUNITIONS AND GAS GUNS REQUIRE A RANGE FLAG.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
15
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
16
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
A-6
CONFIDENCE OBSTACLE COURSE
UM 925085-A-COMPLEX-SW CORNER OF JUNCTION OF
GETTYSBURG AND CHAMPAGNE ROADS
(2.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL
COURSE CONSISTS OF 23 SEPARATE OBSTACLES VARYING
FROM FAIRLY EASY TO DIFFICULT.
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
A-302E OR A-302W CLASSROOMS CAN BE HAND RECEIPTED
FROM RANGE CONTROL, IF THEY ARE AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
NO INDIVIDUAL EQUIPMENT WILL BE WORN BY PARTICIPATING
SOLDIERS (I.E. LBV, RUCK SACKS, WEAPONS, ETC.).
ONLY ONE SOLDIER AT A TIME WILL NEGOTIATE AN OBSTACLE,
UNLESS AN OBSTACLE IS DESIGNED FOR USE BY MORE THAN
ONE SOLDIER.
THE RANGE MUST HAVE AN OIC AND A RSO DUE TO THE
NATURE OF TRAINING.
MEDICAL AID PERSONNEL MUST BE ON THE RANGE, OR ON
ONE OF THE A-COMPLEX RANGES.
MEDICS MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE RANGE. MEDICS MUST
HAVE A LITTER OR BACKBOARD AND A C COLLAR.
REMARKS
POC WILL BE FAMILIAR WITH FM 21-20 PHYSICAL FITNESS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
17
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
OBSTACLE
THE TOUGH ONE
STATION 1
THE TANGLE FOOT
STATION 2
DIRTY NAME
STATION 3
ISLAND HOPPER
STATION 4
EASY BALANCER
STATION 5
BALANCING LOGS
STATION 6
THE BELLY BUSTER
STATION 7
THE TARZAN
STATION 8
BELLY ROBBER
STATION 9
INCLINING WALL
STATION 10
HIGH STEP OVER
STATION 11
REVERSE CLIMB
STATION 12
DESCRIPTIONS OF EACH OBSTACLE
DESCRIPTION
Soldiers climb the net on the high end of the obstacle. They go over or
between the logs and climb down the ladder, they go across the log
walkway and climb down the net to the ground. They jump over the log
cross member and go to the next station.
Soldiers negotiate obstacle by running and stepping in the tires one
foot at a time, alternating every other foot.
Soldiers mount the low log and jump onto the next log. They grasp
over the top of the log with both arms, keeping the belly area in
contact with the log. They swing their legs over the log and go to the
next log in the same manner. From the last log they lower themselves
to the ground.
Soldiers jump from one log to another until all logs are negotiated.
Soldiers walk up one inclined log and down the one on the other side
of the ground.
Soldiers step up on a log and walk or run along it, keeping their
balance.
Soldiers may vault, jump or climb over the log. They must be warned
that it is not stationary. Soldiers must not roll or rock the log while
others are negotiating the obstacle.
Soldiers mount the lower log and then grasp two rungs of the ladder
and swing themselves into the air. They negotiate the length of the
ladder by releasing one hand at a time and swinging forward, grasping
a more distant rung each time.
Soldiers step on the lower log and assume the prone position on the
horizontal logs. They crawl over the logs to the opposite end of the
obstacle.
Soldiers approach the underside of the wall, jump and grasp the top,
and pull themselves up and over. They slide or jump down the incline
to the ground.
Soldiers step over each log, alternating their lead foot or using the
same ones.
Soldiers climb the reverse climb and go down the other side to the
ground.
18
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
JUMP AND LAND
STATION 13
WALK ACROSS
STATION 14
THE TOUGH NUT
STATION 15
BELLY CRAWL
STATION 16
DESCRIPTIONS OF EACH OBSTACLE
SWING, STOP & JUMP
STATION 17
SIX VAULTS
STATION 18
VERTICAL WALL
STATION 19
TRENCH CRAWL
STATION 20
THE WEAVER
STATION 21
THE CONFIDENCE CLIMB
STATION 22
THE LOW BELLY-OVER
STATION 23
Soldiers approach the obstacle from the ladder side. Climb the ladder
to the platform and drop to the ground.
Soldiers step up on log and balance themselves as they walk the
length of the obstacle.
Soldiers step over each X in the same line.
Soldiers move forward under the wire on their bellies to the end of the
obstacle. The direction of negotiating the crawl should be reversed
from time to time.
Soldiers gain momentum with a short run, grasp the rope, and swing
their bodies forward to the top of the cross member. They release the
rope while standing on the wall and jump to the ground.
Soldiers vault over the logs, using one or both hands.
Soldiers approach the wall and pulls himself up to the top and over to
the other side.
Soldiers crawl on stomach through trench under the barbed wire. Only
one trench is necessary.
Soldiers move from one end of the obstacle to the other by weaving
their bodies under one bar and over the next.
Soldiers climb the inclined ladder to the vertical ladder. They go to the
top of the vertical ladder, then down the other side to the ground.
Soldiers mount the low log and jump onto the high log. They grasp
over the top of the log with both arms, keeping the belly area in
contact with it. They swing their legs over the log and lower
themselves to the ground.
19
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
20
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
A-7
RAPPEL TOWER
UM 926085-A-COMPLEX-SE CORNER OF GETTYSBURG AND
CHAMPAGNE ROADS. (2.9 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
A 36 FT. HIGH RAPPEL TOWER WITH A 10’x 26” TOP DECK.
THE RAPPEL TOWER IS DESIGNED TO FACILITATE INDIVIDUALS
IN RAPPELING TECHNIQUES.
THE NORTH SIDE FEATURES SKID GEAR MOUNTED 3 FEET
BELOW THE DECK TO SIMULATE HELICOPTER OPERATIONS.
CLIFF SIMULATION IS PROVIDED ON THE WEST SIDE OF THE
TOWER, WHILE THE EAST SIDE OF THE TOWER HAS WINDOWS,
AS WELL AS A STRAIGHT WALL, FOR URBAN WARFARE
TRAINING.
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
A 13 FT. HIGH INCLINED PRACTICE TOWER IS AVAILABLE FOR
PRELIMINARY FAMILIARIZATION TRAINING.
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO, A-302E CLASSROOM MAY BE REQUESTED, IF AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
OIC AND RSO MUST BE ON SAFETY MEMORANDUM FILED AT
RANGE CONTROL (SEE TABLE 1-1, TAB K).
MEDICAL AID PERSONNEL MUST BE ON THE RANGE, OR ON
ONE OF THE A-COMPLEX RANGES.
MEDICS MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE RANGE AND RANGE
CONTROL.
MEDICS MUST BE INFORMED THAT A BACKBOARD AND A CCOLLAR ARE LOCATED IN THE WALL LOCKER AT THE BASE
OF THE TOWER LADDER.
REMARKS
OIC AND RSO WILL BE FAMILIAR WITH TC 21-24 RAPPELLING,
DATED 09JAN08.
OIC AND RSO MUST INSPECT ALL RAPPEL EQUIPMENT FOR
SERVICEABILITY AT TIME OF ISSUE FROM RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
21
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
22
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
A-9
M320 GRENADE LAUNCHER RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 917085-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
EACH LANE IS 30 METERS WIDE, 500 METERS LONG, AND HAS
4 FIRING POINTS.
PRACTICE TYPE AMMUNITION ONLY. ALL SHOTGUN
AMMUNITION UP TO, AND INCLUDING, 10 GAUGE.
TARGETS PERMANENTLY INSTALLED IAW FM 23-31
5 LANES
180 DEGREES MAGNETIC
BLACK AND WHITE POLE
RED AND WHITE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AT EACH END OF THE FIRING LINE, TO PREVENT PERSONNEL
FROM ADVANCING BEYOND THE FIRING LINE DURING FIRING.
ALL FIRING MUST BE DOWN RANGE AND WITHIN THE LANE
BEING USED. NO INDIVIDUAL SHALL MOVE DOWN RANGE
FROM THE FIRING LINE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
23
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
24
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
A-10
HAND GRENADE PRACTICE LANE AND QUALIFICATION COURSE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 919085-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.3 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE RANGE HAS A PRACTICE LANE CONSISTING OF 5
THROWING STATIONS, AND A QUALIFICATION COURSE THAT
CONTAINS 6 THROWING STATIONS AND 1 IDENTIFICATION
STATION.
PRACTICE GRENADES ONLY
ALL TARGETS ARE PROVIDED
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NEXT TO CHAMPANGE ROAD ON EAST SIDE OF THE RANGE
N/A
PRACTICE GRENADES ONLY. NO PERSONNEL IN FRONT OF
THE THROWING LINE WHEN PERSONNEL ARE ENGAGING
TARGETS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
25
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
26
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
A-11
FERRELL LAKE LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 909086-AT THE INTERSECTION OF CODY AND CHAMPAGNE
ROADS. (3.9 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 52 POINTS WITH UNLIMITED
CONFIGURATIONS, AND IS USED FOR BASIC AND
INTERMEDIATE LAND NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES. THREE 100
METER PACE COUNT LANES ARE ON SITE. THIS IS A SELFCORRECTING COURSE.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
NONE
COURSE MATERIAL AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL. 3 UNITS
CAN CO-USE THE RANGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
27
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
28
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
A-12
SMALL ARMS 25 M ZERO RANGE
UM 927087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD.
(3.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES 25M ZERO AND REFLEXIVE FIRE
CAPABILITIES.
PISTOLS, SHOTGUNS, 5.56MM, AND 7.62MM BALL
REQUEST THROUGH RANGE CONTROL
PEA ROCK-32 FIRING POINTS
347 DEGREES MAGNETIC
BLACK AND WHITE POLE
RED AND WHITE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
YES- IN CLASSROOM
YES
NO
YES- 40 PERSON CAPACITY
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
N/A
PA SYSTEM IS LOCATED IN THE TOWER.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
29
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
30
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
A-13
LITTER OBSTACLE COURSE
UM 92350810-TRAIL TO THE WEST OF SOUTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD, NORTH OF C RANGE.
(3.0 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES MEDICAL PERSONNEL THE ABILITY TO
TRAIN AND TEST FOR THE EXPERT FIELD MEDICAL BADGE
(EFMB). THE COURSE CONSISTS OF 2 LANES WITH 8
OBSTACLES EACH.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
UNITS CAN REQUEST THE A-3 EAST CLASSROOM, IF IT IS
AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
31
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
32
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
A-14
LIVE FIRE FACILITY (SHOOT HOUSE)
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
UM 928087-A-COMPLEX ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD. EAST OF THE A-12
RANGE. (3.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS FACILITY OFFERS MULTIPLE TYPES OF TARGETRY FOR
REALISTIC TRAINING. OBSERVATION/CONTROLLER ROOM HAS DVD-R
RECORDING CAPABILITY. THREE UNITS CAN SIMULTANEOUSLY
OCCUPY FACILITY, WITH THE PROPER BARRIER DOORS CLOSED.
PISTOLS, SHOTGUNS, AND RIFLES UP THROUGH 7.62MM MATCH
GRADE
PAPER AND E-TYPE SILHOUETTE. UNITS CAN BRING THEIR OWN, WITH
PRIOR APPROVAL FROM THE RANGE CONTROL OFFICER. LAZER
SHOT CONSISTS OF MULTIPLE PREPROGRAMED COMPUTER
SCENERIOS SHOWED ON LARGE VIDEO SCREENS. UNITS CAN USE
LIVE OR LAZER TYPE WEAPONS ON THESE SCREENS. CONTACT ATS
FOR DETAILS.
N/A
360 DEGREES
YES-IN THE A-12 CLASSROOM
NO
YES-TARGETS AND EXTRA DOORS ARE STORED HERE
YES-A-12 CLASSROOM. 40 PERSON CAPACITY.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
A-14 CONTROL ROOM PHONE: 7765
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
NO FIRING ALLOWED AT THE CEILINGS, FLOORS, DOWN THE
STAIRWAYS, OR IN THE PERIMETER HALLWAYS.
A SITE VISIT IS HIGHLY RECOMMENDED PRIOR TO PLANNING RANGE
USAGE, TO SEE THE FACILITY, AND ADDRESS TARGET PLACEMENT.
NOTE: A-14 LIVE FIRE FACILITY (SHOOT HOUSE) - USING
UNITS MUST HAVE THEIR OWN IBA WITH SAPPI PLATES, EYE
PROTECTION, AND EAR PROTECTION. SAPPI PLATES MAY BE
HAND-RECEIPTED FROM CENTRAL ISSUE FACILITY (CIF), 320616-2777.
OICs AND RSOs MUST HAVE COMPLETED A CERTIFIED OIC/RSO
SHOOT HOUSE COURSE PRIOR TO RANGE USAGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR
TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING
TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT
TRASH RECEPTACLES.
33
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
34
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
35
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE LOCATION
A-15 FLRC
FIELD LEADER REACTION COURSE
RANGE DESCRIPTION
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 92540803-SOUTH GETTYSBURG ROAD.
(2.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE A-15 IS A 7 HOUR PERIOD OF TRAINING. THE COURSE
CONSISTS OF 12 STATIONS THAT POSE DIFFERENT
LEADERSHIP PROBLEMS IN A TACTICAL SETTING. THE
COURSE IS USED TO EVALUATE A CANDIDATE’S LEADERSHIP
POTENTIAL UNDER FIELD AND SIMULATED COMBAT
CONDITIONS.
C RANGE CLASSROOM MAY BE UTILIZED, IF IT IS AVAILABLE.
C RANGE CLASSROOM OR PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE
REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND SERVICES DIV, 320-6163128/3130.
SINCGARS: 3610O PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
36
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
37
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
38
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
Bennett Hill
Ski and Tubing Hill
UM 93300872 (2.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE HILL HAS 1-MAIN SKI/TUBING RUN, PLUS 3 ADDITIONAL SKI
RUNS. THE MAIN SKI AND TUBING RUN HAS A TOW ROPE. THE
HILL HAS 2 WARMING SHEDS. TUBES ARE PROVIDED.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
THE UNIT POC MUST RECEIVE A TOW ROPE MOTOR
OPERATIONS CLASS FROM RANGE CONTROL PRIOR TO
OCCUPYING THE RANGE.
MEDICAL SUPPORT MUST BE PRESENT ON THE RANGE
(MINIMUM CLS/FIRST RESPONDER)
AUTHORIZED ACCESS ROUTE: FROM RANGE CONTROL, GO
WEST ON ARGONNE ROAD, NORTH ON SOUTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD, THEN EAST ON CHAMPAGNE ROAD. PARKING AREA IS
LOCATED AT THE TOP OF THE HILL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
39
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
40
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
B-1
SMALL ARMS 25 METER ZERO RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 924164-NORTH RANGE COMPLEX ON NORTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD. (7.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
25M ZERO, MACHINE GUN FAMILIARIZATION, AND REFLEXIVE
FIRE
ALL SMALL ARMS
REQUEST THROUGH RANGE CONTROL
32 FIRING POINTS
269 DEGREES MAGNETIC
BLACK AND WHITE POLE
RED AND WHITE POLE
YES-NORTH RANGE-SOUTH CLASSROOM HAS LATRINE
FACILITIES. PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED
THROUGH SUPPLY AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES-SANDBAGS AND SAFETY PADDLES ARE STORED IN THE
NORTH RANGE MAINTENANCE BUILDING. KEY TO THE
BUILDNG IS IN THE RANGE PACKET.
YES-NORTH RANGE-SOUTH CLASSROOM. 40 PERSON
CAPACITY.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
NONE
THIS RANGE MUST BE PLACED INTO CHECKFIRE STATUS FOR
NORTH RANGE TARGET MAINTENANCE WHEN BOTH RANGES
ARE FIRING.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
41
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
42
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
B-2
SMALL ARMS 25 METER ZERO RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
CLASSROOM/MESSHALL
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 924171-NORTH RANGE COMPLEX ON NORTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD. (7.9 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
25M ZERO, MACHINE GUN FAMILIARIZATION, REFLEXIVE FIRE,
AND MICLIC
ALL SMALL ARMS AND MICLIC
REQUEST THROUGH RANGE CONTROL
32 FIRING POINTS
266 DEGREES MAGNETIC
BLACK AND WHITE POLE
RED AND WHITE POLE
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
NONE
THIS RANGE SDZ CLOSES THE NORTH RANGE TARGET AREA.
THIS RANGE MUST BE PLACED INTO CHECKFIRE STATUS IF
NORTH RANGE NEEDS TO PERFORM TARGET MAINTENANCE.
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND
RECEIPT TO MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
43
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
44
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
CLASSROOM/MESSHALL
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
B-2 SHOOT HOUSE
MOUT SITE
UM 924171-NORTH RANGE COMPLEX ON NORTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD. (7.9 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS FACILITY OFFERS 3 ROOMS.
BLANKS AND SIMUNITIONS
N/A
NONE
N/A
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
YES-TARGETS AND EXTRA DOORS ARE STORED HERE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED FOR
SIMUNITIONS. RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
OIC AND RSO REQUIRED FOR BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, AND
GAS. MUST BE ON WEAPON SAFETY CERTIFICATION
MEMORANDUM AND HAVE A CURRENT RANGE SAFETY
BRIEFING.
ALL OTHERS USE BLANK AMMUNITION ONLY!
REMARKS
SMOKE OR CS OF ANY KIND IS NOT ALLOWED ON THE RANGE.
USE OF FLASH BANGS ON THE WALLS OR FLOORS IS
PROHIBITED.
SIMUNITIONS REQUIRE A RANGE FLAG.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
45
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
B-2 SHOOTHOUSE FLOOR PLAN
46
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
B-3
GETTYSBURG ROAD LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 925137 – AT THE INTERSECTION OF NORTH GETTYSBURG
AND NORMANDY ROADS. (5.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 33 POINTS, AND IS USED FOR INTERMEDIATE
TO ADVANCED LAND NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NONE
N/A
RANGE CANNOT BE OCCUPIED WHEN 7.62MM MATCH GRADE
AMMO IS BEING FIRED ON THE A-COMPLEX RANGES.
COURSE MATERIAL AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
47
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
48
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
B-4
MOUNTED LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
VARIOUS STARTING POINTS
THIS COURSE HAS 6 PRE-DETERMINED ROUTES, WITH 4
POINTS EACH. THE ROUTES HAVE DIFFERENT DEGREES OF
DIFFICULTY.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
WHEN PERFORMING NIGHT OPERATIONS WITH NIGHT VISION
DEVICES, THE UNIT MUST HAVE AN OIC AND RSO ON SAFETY
CERTIFICATION MEMORANDUM, AND THEY MUST HAVE A
CURRENT RANGE SAFETY BRIEFING PRIOR TO OPENING THE
RANGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
49
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
50
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
B-5
LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
UM 941069-AT THE INTERSECTION OF ARGONNE AND FORT
RIPLEY ROADS. (1.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 34 POINTS WITH UNLIMITED
CONFIGURATIONS, AND IS USED FOR BASIC AND
INTERMEDIATE LAND NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES.
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NONE
NONE
NONE
COURSE MATERIAL IS AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
51
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
52
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
B-6
ENGINEER DIG SITE
UM 94180830-ON FT. RIPLEY ROAD
(1.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE OFFERS THE HEAVY CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENT
OPERATORS AN APPROVED MECHANICAL DIG AREA TO
PERFORM MOS TASKS IN.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
UNIT MUST BACKFILL ALL EXCAVATIONS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES..
53
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
54
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
B-7
LAND NAVIGATION COURSE
SP-1: UM 92950692
SP-2: UM 93120692
SP-3: UM 93460692
(1.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 37 POINTS WITH UNLIMITED
CONFIGURATIONS. USED FOR BASIC AND INTERMEDIATE
LAND NAVIGATION TECHNIQUES.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
COURSE MATERIAL IS AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
55
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
56
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
B-8
TACTICAL MINE LANE
UM 9418207469-ON FT. RIPLEY ROAD.
(1.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE OFFERS THE MINE DETECTOR (AN/PSS-14)
OPERATORS AN APPROVED LANE TO PERFORM MOS TASKS
ON.
TRAINING LANES WILL BE USED TO TRAIN NEW OPERATORS
AND VALIDATE CURRENT OPERATORS.
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
TACTICAL LANES WILL BE USED TO DEMONSTRATE AND TRAIN
MISSION- OR THEATER-SPCIFIC MINE DETECTION TECHNIQUES
AND OPERATIONS.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
57
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
58
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
BREACH
LIVE-FIRE EXERCISE BREACH FACILITY
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 918158 – ENTER RANGE FROM BARRIER 31 ON NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD.
(7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS FACILITY CONSISTS OF THREE STATIONS:
1) DOOR BREACHING STRUCTURE- 8 FEET HIGH FACADE WITH 33 X 80 INCH
DOOR
2) WALL BREACHING STRUCTURE- 8 FEET HIGH X 20.5 INCHES FACADE
3) WINDOW BREACHING STRUCTURE- 8 FEET HIGH FACADE WITH A WINDOW
OPENING OF 32 3/4 INCHES X 38 3/4 INCHES
NO MORE THAN FOUR POUNDS OF C4; DETONATION CORD.
SHOTGUN FOR DOOR BREACHING ONLY
ALL UNITS MUST ORDER DOORS AND WINDOWS 90 DAYS IN ADVANCE.
CIVILIAN AGENCIES THAT UTILIZE THE RANGE MUST REPLACE THE DOORS
AND WINDOWS THAT THEY UTILIZE.
DO NOT PLACE CHARGES ON THE METAL STUDS AT STATION 2.
N/A
SEE SDZ LAYOUT
SEE SDZ LAYOUT
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM IS LOCATED ON THE RANGE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL. HOURLY
COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY
MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
ROAD GUARD WILL BE POSTED AT BARRIER 31, WITH COMMUNICATIONS TO
THE RANGE OIC.
BARRIER 31 WILL BE DOWN-NOT-LOCKED AFTER UNIT PASSES THROUGH IT.
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE CONTROL
FOR EACH TASK.
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING CALL MUST BE MADE TO RANGE CONTROL
FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO NOTIFY RANGE CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS
COMPLETE.
Per Ammunition Information Notice (AIN) 053-10, dated 10FEB10, DODIC: AA54
DOUBLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS AND MUFFS) AND EYE
PROTECTION
(GOGGLES) SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDIERS FIRING THE SHOTGUN AND BY
SOLDIERS WITHIN 8.5 METERS OF THE WEAPON DURING DOOR BREACHING
OPERATIONS WHEN FIRING IN CLOSE PROXIMITY TO REFLECTIVE SURFACE.
ALL SOLDIERS WITHIN 8.5 METERS TO 30 METERS OF THE FIRING POINT
SHOULD WEAR SINGLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS OR MUFFS).
REFERENCE TM 9-1005-338-13&P, TECHNICAL MANUAL UNIT AND DIRECT
SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL, MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN, MODEL
500 AND MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN MODEL 590, MAY 2005.
REMARKS
METAL DOOR BREACHING IS CONSIDERED METAL CUTTING; REFER TO AR 38663 FOR DETAILS. THE USING UNIT MUST PICK UP ALL BLAST FRAGMENTS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR TO
RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING TRASH
DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH
RECEPTACLES.
59
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
60
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
C
NBC MASKING PROFICIENCY RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 927080-SOUTH GETTYSBURG ROAD.
(2.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
AN NBC ORIENTED TRAINING AREA WITH CLASSROOM,
LATRINE, AND GAS CHAMBER.
CS GAS
N/A - DIRECTION OF ADVANCE IS SOUTH TO NORTH THROUGH
CHAMBER.
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM
YES
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
OIC AND RSO MUST BE ON SAFETY MEMORANDUM FILED AT
RANGE CONTROL (SEE TABLE 1-1, TAB K). MEDICAL AID
PERSONNEL MUST BE ON THE RANGE, OR AT ONE OF THE ACOMPLEX RANGES. MEDICS MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE
RANGE.
OIC AND RSO WILL BE FAMILIAR WITH CHAPTER 15 OF THE
CAMP RIPLEY RANGE OPERATIONS APPENDIX. PERSONNEL
NOT PARTICIPATING IN COURSE TRAINING EXERCISES WILL
REMAIN ON THE UPWIND SIDE OF THE COURSE, AT A SAFE
DISTANCE FROM THE GAS FUMES OR SMOKE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
61
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
62
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
C1 IED RANGE_IED
IED PETTING ZOO
UM 927080-SOUTH GETTYSBURG ROAD.
(2.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES A BASIC UNDERSTANDING OF IEDs
AND HOW THEY ARE EMPLOYED. THERE IS A STATIC DISPLAY
OF MUNITIONS IN THE C RANGE CLASSROOM.
AN OPEN AIR CLASSROOM IS ON SITE CONTAINING EXAMPLES
OF IEDS, EFPS, AND A VBIED. SEE RANGE PACKET AND RANGE
SOP FOR FURTHER DETAILS.
BLANK AMMUNTION ONLY
N/A
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM
YES
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
N/A
A LAPTOP AND A PROJECTOR CAN BE HAND-RECEIPTED FROM
RANGE CONTROL. THE LAPTOP CONTAINS A SLIDE
PRESENTATION OF THE LOCATION OF ALL IEDS ON THE LANE,
AS WELL AS VARIOUS VIDEOS AND OTHER TRAINING
MATERIAL.
UNITS MUST NOT TAKE TRAINING AIDS TO DIFFERENT
LOCATIONS OTHER THEN THOSE ON THE IED RANGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
63
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
64
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
CACTF
COMBINED ARMS COLLECTIVE TRAINING FACILITY
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 939072-TA 10 (2.2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE WILL HAVE 20 CEMENT BLOCK STRUCTURES TO
PERFORM MOUT OPERATIONS IN. RANGE COMPLETION WILL
NOT BE UNTIL LATE 2011.
SIMUNITIONS AND BLANKS
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS WILL BE SCHEDULED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL UNITS ALLOW PERSONNEL
TO BIVOUAC WITHIN THE STRUCTURES. THESE STRUCTURES
ARE FOR MOUT TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY.
CACTF-1 AND -2 ARE CURRENTLY AVAILABLE FOR TRAINING.
OIC AND RSO REQUIRED FOR BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, AND
GAS. MUST BE ON SAFETY CERTIFICATION ORDERS AND
ATTEND A RANGE SAFETY BRIEFING.
ALL OTHERS USE BLANK AMMUNITION ONLY.
HC SMOKE IS NOT ALLOWED ON THE RANGE. SMOKE OR CS
OF ANY KIND IS NOT ALLOWED IN ANY BLDGS. USE OF FLASH
BANGS ON THE WALLS OR FLOORS IS PROHIBITED.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
65
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
66
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
CLFX
CONVOY LIVE FIRE EXERCISE
CASSINO ROAD-BETWEEN ANZIO ROAD AND KODIAK ROAD. START
POINT IS AT GRID UM 9212923103.
(11.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES, UNDER CONTROLLED CONDITIONS, A LIVE
FIRE EXERCISE FOR PATROL SIZE ELEMENTS CONDUCTING CONVOY
OPERATIONS. 83 AUTOMATED TARGETS ARE SET-UP ON THE RANGE.
SEE CLFX SOP FOR TARGET LOCATIONS. UNITS CAN USE DIFFERENT
TARGET SCENERIOS IF APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
5.56 MM, 7.62 MM, .50 CAL., AND 40MM TP
TARGET REQUIREMENTS MUST BE SUBMITTED TO RANGE CONTROL
AND ATS 90 DAYS PRIOR TO EXECUTION. THE REMOTE CONTROLLER
MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS
(320-616-3132).
SEE RANGE MAP IN THE CLFX SOP FOR TARGET AREA LOCATIONS
360 DEGREES MAG AND 180 DEGREES MAG
SCENARIO DEPENDENT. TARGET MATRIX AND TRAINING SCENARIO
MUST BE APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT. TARGET MATRIX AND TRAINING SCENARIO
MUST BE APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY ORDINATE PERMISSIBLE FOR .50 CAL. AND
BELOW.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
VICINITY OF THE OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM IN TA 58
OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM IN TA 58. GRID LOCATION IS UM 92622157.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
THERE ARE TWO FLAG POLES FOR THIS RANGE. 1) AT THE
INTERSECTION OF ANZIO AND CASSINO ROAD. 2) AT THE
INTERSECTION OF CASSINO AND KODIAK ROADS.
UNIT MUST HAVE ROAD GUARDS AT BOTH FLAG POLES, WITH COMMO
(MOTOROLA TALK-ABOUT RADIOS) TO THE OIC.
NOTICE: DUE TO BATWING SDZ USAGE REQUIREMENTS AND
CURRENT TARGET LOCATIONS, THIS RANGE IS LIMITED TO 7.62MM
AND BELOW. RFMSS RESERVATIONS THAT INCLUDE 7.62MM
AMMUNITION WILL BE HANDLED ON A CASE-BY-CASE BASIS,
DEPENDENT ON THE FIELD TRAINING AREA OPTEMPO, AND THE
TARGET SCENARIO REQUESTED BY THE UNIT.
CONVOY LIVE FIRE IS AUTHORIZED FOR EAST-TO-WEST TRAVEL
ONLY. (SEE CLFX SOP)
THE IPBC RANGE CLOSES THIS RANGE.
CLFX SOP IS AVAILABLE IN THE RANGE PACKET, OR FROM RANGE
CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR
TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING
TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT
TRASH RECEPTACLES.
67
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Engagement
Area
MK-19 Range
1 North
2 South
3 North Facade
4 South Facade
5 North Facades
6 South Truck
Authorized Weapon Systems:
MK 19
X
5.56
M249
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
68
M2
X
X
X
7.62 mm
X
X
X
X
X
X
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
RESTRICTIONS
CTF
COLLECTIVE TRAINING FACILITY
UM 939072-TA 10 (2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 7 CEMENT BLOCK STRUCTURES: SCHOOL,
HOTEL, BANK, AND 4 RESIDENCES TO PERFORM MOUT
OPERATIONS IN. THE HOTEL CAN BE UTILIZED FOR RAPPEL
OPERATIONS.
SIMUNITIONS AND BLANKS
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
BUILDING KEYS ARE HAND RECEIPTED FROM RANGE CONTROL
LOCKS ARE KEYED SEPARATELY.
UNDER NO CIRCUMSTANCES WILL UNITS ALLOW PERSONNEL
TO BIVOUAC WITHIN THE STRUCTURES. THESE STRUCTURES
ARE FOR MOUT TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY.
REMARKS
RAPPEL OPERATIONS SAFETY REQUIREMENTS ARE THE SAME
AS FOR A-7. SEE TAB K (OIC/RSO REQUIREMENTS)
OIC AND RSO REQUIRED FOR BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, AND
GAS. MUST BE ON SAFETY CERTIFICATION ORDERS AND
ATTEND A RANGE SAFETY BRIEFING.
ALL OTHERS USE BLANK AMMUNITION ONLY.
HC SMOKE IS NOT ALLOWED ON THE RANGE. SMOKE OR CS
OF ANY KIND IS NOT ALLOWED IN ANY BLDGS. USE OF FLASH
BANGS ON THE WALLS OR FLOORS IS PROHIBITED.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
69
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
70
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
D
Shotgun/Short Range Marksmanship Range
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
LEFT LIMIT: M4/M16
RIGHT LIMIT: M4/M16
LEFT LIMIT: SHOTGUN
RIGHT LIMIT: SHOTGUN
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
COVERED MESS
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 934120-NORTH OF DONALDSON ROAD, ON EAST BOUNDARY
ROAD. (3.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS A SPLIT FIRING LINE. NORTHERN-HALF IS SHOTGUN
QUALIFICATION. SOUTHERN-HALF IS 5.56MM ZERO/REFLEXIVE FIRE.
ALL SHOTGUN; 9MM-5.56MM
Will NOT support the usage of the new M855A1 5.56mm Enhanced
Performance Round (EPR).
TARGET STANDS WITH COROPLAST ARE ON THE RANGE. PAPER
TARGETS ARE AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
20-SHOTGUN FIRING POINTS; 40-ZERO/REFLEXIVE FIRE POINTS
270 DEG MAG
B/W POLE
R/W POLE
GREEN POLE
ORANGE POLE
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
LATRINE IS CONDEMNED. PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED
THROUGH SUPPLY AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES: FACILITY # 13303
NO
NO
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
5.56MM IS THE LARGEST AMMUNITION AUTHORIZED, AND CAN ONLY
BE FIRED ON THE SOUTHERN FIRING LINE.
SINGLE WEAPON SYSTEM USAGE ON ONE FIRING LINE:
ONE OIC AND RSO.
MULTIPLE WEAPON SYSTEM USAGE ON BOTH FIRING LINES: ONE OIC
AND RSO CERTIFIED ON ALL WEAPON SYSTEMS BEING FIRED, OR
TWO OICs AND RSOs CERTIFIED ON SPECIFIC WEAPON SYSTEMS.
REMARKS
Per Ammunition Information Notice (AIN) 053-10, dated 10FEB10,
DODIC: AA54
DOUBLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS AND MUFFS) AND
EYE PROTECTION(GOGGLES) SHOULD BE WORN BY SOLDIERS
FIRING THE SHOTGUN AND BY SOLDIERS WITHIN 8.5 METERS OF THE
WEAPON DURING DOOR BREACHING OPERATIONS WHEN FIRING IN
CLOSE PROXIMITY TO REFLECTIVE SURFACE. ALL SOLDIERS WITHIN
8.5 METERS TO 30 METERS OF THE FIRING POINT SHOULD WEAR
SINGLE HEARING PROTECTION (EARPLUGS OR MUFFS). REFERENCE
TM 9-1005-338-13&P, TECHNICAL MANUAL UNIT AND DIRECT
SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL, MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN,
MODEL 500 AND MOSSBERG 12 GAUGE SHOTGUN MODEL 590, MAY
2005.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR
TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING
TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT
TRASH RECEPTACLES.
71
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
72
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
DEMO-1
M RANGE DEMOLITIONS SITE
UM 916126-LOCATED ON M RANGE, SOUTH OF THE SRTR
TARGET AREA. (6.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITIONS TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED
WITH RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
BARRIER 9-THE BARRIER WILL BE DOWN-NOT-LOCKED. UNIT
WILL ENTER THE RANGE AT THIS BARRIER. ROAD GUARDS
MUST HAVE COMMO WITH THE RANGE OIC.
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4
ORANGE PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A 5-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE
CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
REMARKS
THE RANGE CANNOT BE OCCUPIED IF THERE IS 7.62 MM
FIRING ON THE A-COMPLEX.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
73
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
74
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
DEMO-2
OP-2 DEMOLITIONS SITE
UM 918157-LOCATED ON THE VONDERBAHN.
(7.8 MILES FORM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITIONS TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED
WITH RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4
ORANGE PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE
CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
REMARKS
THE RANGE CANNOT BE OCCUPIED IF THERE IS 7.62 MM
FIRING ON THE A-COMPLEX.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
75
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
76
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
DEMO-3
DEMOLITIONS SITE
UM 877152-LOCATED ON THE SHEEP LAKE FIREBREAK.
(11.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITIONS TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED
WITH RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
RANGE ENTRANCE
AT TEMPORARY BARRIER PLACED BY RANGE CONTROL.
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4
ORANGE PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
REMARKS
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE
CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
77
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
78
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
DEMO-4
SEAL CABIN DEMOLITIONS SITE
UM 9037625829-LOCATED ON THE SEAL CABIN RANGE.
(17.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITION TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED
WITH RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT RANGE ENTRANCE
AT BARRIER 68
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4
ORANGE PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
REMARKS
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE
CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
79
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
80
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
DEMO-5
LIGHT DEMOLITIONS RANGE
UM 90092733-LOCATED IN TRAINING AREA 73.
(21.1 MILES RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITION TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED
WITH RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT RANGE ENTRANCE
AT RANGE ENTRANCE
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4
ORANGE PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
REMARKS
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE
CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
81
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
82
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
DEMO-6
TA 75 DEMOLITIONS SITE
UM 907284-LOCATED IN TRAINING AREA 75.
(20.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITION TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATIS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 100 LBS TNT EQUIVALENT.
BANGALORE TORPEDOES ARE LIMITED TO ½ KIT.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED
WITH RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
NA
NA
NONE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED.
AT RANGE ENTRANCE
BARRIER N-13 ON PUSAN ROAD
THE MAXIMUM ALLOWABLE CHARGE ON THE RANGE IS THE
EQUIVALENT OF 100 POUNDS OF TNT PER BLAST, 5 TIMES PER
YEAR, DURING DAYLIGHT HOURS ONLY, AND A MINIMUM OF 30
MINUTES BETWEEN BLASTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS MUST BE PERFORMED WITHIN THE 4
ORANGE PICKETS (LIMIT MARKERS).
A FIVE-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
REMARKS
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING MUST BE MADE TO RANGE
CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO, NOTIFY RANGE
CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
83
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
84
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DT-1
TRACKED VEHICLE DRIVER TRAINING COURSE
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 912063-LOCATED IN TA 2.
(4.2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS COURSE IS 1.3 MILES LONG, AND OFFERS SEVEN LEFT
TURNS, FIVE RIGHT TURNS, THREE WOODED AREAS, SIX
INCLINE AREAS, AND TWO SOFT AREAS.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
ALL TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED OPERATOR IN THE
VEHICLE. FOR NIGHT DRIVER TRAINING WITH NVD USAGE, ALL
TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED NVD TRAINER WITH THEM.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
85
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
86
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DT-2
TRACKED VEHICLE DRIVER TRAINING COURSE
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 875112-LOCATED IN TA 21.
(8.0 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS COURSE IS CONVENIENTLY LOCATED TO FACILITATE
DRIVER TRAINING WITH RANGE FIRING AT EAST, CENTER, AND
WEST RANGES. IT IS 4.4 MILES LONG, AND OFFERS A WATER
HAZARD, SPANNING DITCH, RAILCAR, AND A DIRT BERM.
YES-CENTER RANGE CLASSROOM
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
UNITS MAY SCHEDULE AND UTILIZE CRG CLASSROOM, IF
AVAILABLE.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
ALL TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED OPERATOR IN THE
VEHICLE. FOR NIGHT DRIVER TRAINING WITH NVD USAGE, ALL
TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED NVD TRAINER WITH THEM.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
87
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
88
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DT-3
TRACKED VEHICLE DRIVER TRAINING COURSE
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 913135-LOCATED IN TA 27 WITHIN THE M RANGE.
(6.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS COURSE IS 1.9 MILES LONG. IT OFFERS EXCELLENT
VISIBILITY FOR OVERALL CONTROL OF THE COURSE DURING
USE. THE COURSE HAS FIVE LEFT TURNS, FIVE RIGHT TURNS,
TWO WOODED AREAS, FIVE INCLINE AREAS, AND THREE SOFT
AREAS.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
M, M-SRTR, AND DEMO-1 RANGES WILL CONFLICT WITH, AND
CLOSE THIS RANGE.
ALL TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED OPERATOR IN THE
VEHICLE. FOR NIGHT DRIVER TRAINING WITH NVD USAGE, ALL
TRAINEES MUST HAVE A LICENSED NVD TRAINER WITH THEM.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
89
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
90
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
F
BIATHLON COURSE AND 25M ZERO RANGE
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
UM 906098-ON CODY ROAD.
(4.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS IS A SKI AND SHOOT RANGE CONSISTING OF A SERIES OF SKI
TRAILS, A 50 METER .22 CAL. RIFLE RANGE, AND A 25M ZERO RANGE
FOR 5.56MM. THIS RANGE IS THE SITE FOR THE NATIONAL GUARD
BUREAU (NGB) BIATHLON CHAMPIONSHIPS. IT FEATURES 3 MILES OF
BITUMINOUS TRACK FOR YEAR-ROUND TRAINING.
.22 CAL., 5.56MM, AND ALL STANDARD PISTOL AMMUNITION
This range will NOT support the usage of the new M855A1 5.56mm
Enhanced Performance Round (EPR).
BIATHLON: OFFICIAL BIATHLON LARGE AND SMALL BORE TARGETS
FIRING LINE
25M ZERO: TARGET STANDS WITH COROPLAST BACKING. TARGETRY
IS AVAILABLE AT RANGE CONTROL.
BIATHLON: 31 FIRING POINTS
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
25M ZERO: 29 FIRING POINTS
29 DEGREES MAGNETIC
POINTS 1-31 BLACK AND WHITE POLE, AT 31DEGREES MAGNETIC.
LEFT LIMIT
POINTS 32-60 RED AND WHITE POLE, AT 31DEGREES MAGNETIC.
POINTS 1-31 RED, WHIITE, AND BLUE POLE AT 21DEGREES MAGNETIC.
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
TIMERS HOUSE
WARMING AND WAXING
HUTS
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
POINTS 32-60 BLACK AND WHITE POLE AT 21DEGREES MAGNETIC.
YES
YES
YES
YES-23 HUTS
YES-100 PERSON CAPACITY
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
CLASSROOM FIELD PHONE: 7786
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AS REQUIRED TO PROHIBIT PERSONNEL FROM ADVANCING BEYOND
FIRING LINE, OR INTERFERING WITH SKIERS ON TRAILS.
ONLY .22 CAL. AMMUNITION WILL BE FIRED AT THE METAL BIATHLON
TARGETS. THIS RANGE CLOSES CODY ROAD.
BIATHLON TARGETS MUST BE REPAINTED PRIOR TO RANGE
CLEARANCE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR
TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING
TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT
TRASH RECEPTACLES.
91
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
92
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
93
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
WARMING SHEDS
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
F RANGE
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
UM 906098-ON CODY ROAD.
(4.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
BLANKS ONLY
IN CLASSROOM
IN CLASSROOM
WARMING SHEDS MAY BE UTILIZED AS SLEEPING ROOMS
YES-100 PERSON CAPACITY
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
CLASSROOM FIELD PHONE: 7786
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
VEHICLES ARE NOT AUTHORIZED ACCESS THROUGH THE
GREEN GATE. VEHICLES ARE NOT AUTHORIZED ACCESS TO
THE TRAIL NETWORK. TENTS MAY BE SET UP IN THE OPEN
AREA TO THE SOUTH OF THE TIMING SHED AND THE RING OF
FLAGS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
94
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
95
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
FARP
FORWARD ARMING AND RESUPPLY POINT
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 869109 TRAINING AREA 18. SOUTH OF LUZON ROAD.
(7.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
LARGE OPEN FLAT AREA WITH A BERM.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
NO TRACKED VEHICLES ARE ALLOWED WITHIN THE SPECIFIED
LANDING ZONE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
96
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
97
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
F&M 1
FIRE AND MOVEMENT RANGE
UM 921191 (8.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
F&M 1 CONSISTS OF A 197m SPLIT PATH THAT MEANDERS
THROUGH AN OAK FORESTED AREA, WITH 38 REMOTECONTROLLED, BATTERY OPERATED, POP-UP TARGETS ON THE
PATH.
PISTOLS, SHOTGUNS, SUB-MACHINE GUNS, AND 5.56MM
REMOTE CONTROLLER MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH
AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS (ATS), 320-616-3132/3133.
N/A
270 DEGREES MAGNETIC
200 DEGREES MAGNETIC
340 DEGREES MAGNETIC
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
NOTICE: DUE TO BATWING SDZ USAGE REQUIREMENTS AND
THE CURRENT TARGET LOCATIONS, THIS RANGE IS NOW
LIMITED TO TARGETS 7-10 ONLY (BOTH NORTH AND SOUTH
LANES).
NO CROSSFIRING AT TARGETS ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE
LANE
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
98
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Barrier 37B
Barrier 37
East Boundary Road
Barrier 37A
99
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
F&M 2
FIRE AND MOVEMENT RANGE
UM 933113-LOCATED ON EAST BOUNDARY ROAD.
(3.3 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
F&M 2 CONSISTS OF A 100m PATH THAT MEANDERS THROUGH
A BRUSHY AREA, WITH 10 REMOTE CONTROLLED, BATTERY
OPERATED, POP-UP TARGETS.
9MM, .45 CAL., SHOTGUNS, AND SUB-MACHINE GUNS.
REQUEST REMOTE CONTROLLER THROUGH AUTOMATED
TARGET SYSTEMS (ATS), 320-616-3132/3133.
N/A
300 DEGREES MAGNETIC
324 DEGREES MAGNETIC
216 DEGREES MAGNETIC
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
NO CROSSFIRING AT TARGETS ON OPPOSITE SIDE OF THE
LANE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
100
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
101
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
HGR
HAND GRENADE RANGE (LIVE GRENADE FAMILIARIZATION)
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
L RANGE-UM 918161
THIS RANGE GIVES SOLDIERS THE EFFECTS, EXPERIENCE,
AND CONFIDENCE IN HANDLING LIVE GRENADES. THE RANGE
ALSO HAS A PRACTICE THROWING BAY. (8.0 MILES FROM
RANGE CONTROL)
M67 FRAGMENTATION HAND GRENADE
PERMANENTLY INSTALLED
2 THROWING PITS
320 DEGREES MAGNETIC
N/A
N/A
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NONE
NONE
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE ENTRANCE TO L RANGE
BARRIER 29-AT THE ENTRANCE TO L RANGE
UNIT MUST COMPLETE HAND GRENADE QULIFICATION ON A-10
RANGE, AND MOCK BAY FAMILIARIZATION PRIOR TO
THROWING LIVE GRENADES.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
RANGE SOP IS IN THE RANGE PACKET.
102
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
103
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
IED LANE_IED
IED-DEFEAT LANE
RANGE LOCATION
RANGE DESCRIPTION
TYPE OF AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
TARGET BLDG
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF OE-254
ANTENNA MAST
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 95522711 (TA 64) – INTERSECTION OF CHORWAN AND
WONSAN ROADS.
(15 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE LANE CONSISTS OF SEVERAL IED-DEFEAT TRAINING
OPPORTUNITIES, INCLUDING A PEDESTRIAN OVERPASS,
UNDERPASS, BARRIERS, AND A SMALL VILLAGE. THE LANE
SUPPORTS USAGE BY ALL MILITARY VEHICLES. RANGE USAGE
CAN BE INCORPORATED WITH OTHER MOUT FACILITIES, OR
ELSEWHERE DOWN RANGE.
Y-4 TACTICAL TRAINING BASE (TTB) IS LOCATED DIRECTLY
SOUTH OF THIS RANGE, TO FURTHER ENHANCE THE AREA OF
OPERATIONS (AO).
CIVILIAN CONTRACTORS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR RANGE
OPERATIONS AND EQUIPMENT, AND HAVE MULTIPLE PREWRITTEN SCENARIOS AVAILABLE. UNITS CAN ALSO REQUEST
THE CONTRACTORS TO WRITE SPECIFIC SCENARIOS FOR THE
OWN TRAINING NEEDS.
ALL BLANK AMMUNITION, PYROTECHNICS, AND SIMUNITIONS
COORDINATE WITH THE CIVILIAN CONTRACTORS
N/A
N/A
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
IN Y-4 TTB
N/A
NONE
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
104
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
105
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
IPBC
INFANTRY PLATOON BATTLE COURSE
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
TA 57 (10.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE PROVIDES, UNDER CONTROLLED CONDITIONS, A
LIVE FIRE EXERCISE FOR INFANTRY PLATOONS WITH
ARMOR/MECH SUPPORT. IT CONSISTS OF TWO MANEUVER
LANES (LIGHT AND HEAVY) WITH BUNKER AND TRENCH
SYSTEMS. INDIRECT FIRE WEAPONS ARE SIMULATED BY THE
USE OF DEMOLITION CHARGES AND SMOKE POTS, OR CAN BE
INCORPORATED INTO A CALFEX SCENARIO. THE RANGE ALSO
HAS AN OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM AND A PRACTICE LANE.
UP TO 7.62 MM AT THE BUNKER SITES. .50 CAL., 25 MM, AND
120MM FOR THE HEAVY MANEUVER LANE FINAL OBJECTIVE.
40 MM ON THE MK-19 RANGE LIGHT MANEUVER LANE.
TARGET MATRIX MUST BE APRROVED BY RANGE CONTROL
OIC. REMOTE CONTROLLED TARGET LIFTERS NEED TO BE
REQUESTED THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS (320616-3132/3133).
FIRING BY ATTACKING TROOPS IS LIMITED TO THE VICINITY OF
EACH OBJECTIVE. SUPPORTING MACHINE GUN FIRE IS FROM
ESTABLISHED SUPPORT-BY-FIRE (SBF) POSITIONS.
270 DEGREES MAG. TO 360 DEGREES MAG.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT. TARGET MATRIX AND TRAINING
SCENARIO MUST BE APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT. TARGET MATRIX AND TRAINING
SCENARIO MUST BE APPROVED BY RANGE CONTROL.
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY ORDINATE PERMISSIBLE FOR .50 CAL.
AND BELOW. 5 DEGREES FOR TANK AND BFV.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
VICINITY OF THE OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM
OPEN-AIR CLASSROOM IS LOCATED AT UM 927215
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
UM 92732141 (BARRIER 40). ENTRANCE TO THE TROUT POND.
BARRIER 40 WILL BE DOWN-NOT-LOCKED FOR UNIT ACCESS
TO THE RANGE. UNIT MUST POST A ROAD GUARD AT THIS
BARRIER WHEN THE RANGE IS LIVE FIRING.
THE CLFX RANGE CLOSES THIS RANGE. SEE RANGE SOP FOR
FURTHER RESTRICTIONS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
106
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
107
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
108
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
109
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
110
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
111
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
ISBC
INFANTRY SQUAD BATTLE COURSE
UM 88272886 (20.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
This complex is used to train and test infantry squads on the skills
necessary to conduct tactical movement techniques; and detect,
identify, engage, and defeat stationary and moving infantry and
armor targets in a tactical array
Primary features include—
6 stationary armor targets
1 moving armor target
20 stationary infantry target
6 moving infantry targets
2 trench obstacles
5 machine gun/observation bunkers (with sound effects simulator)
All targets are fully automated, and the event-specific target scenario
is computer-driven and scored from the range operations center
The range operating system is fully capable of providing immediate
performance feedback to the using participants
Associated Range Operations and Control facilities:
Standard SAROCA facilities
Requirement Document: FM 3-21.8, ARTEP 7-8 Drill, TC 7-9
RANGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION
COMPLETION DATE: TBD
112
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
113
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
TARGET BLDG
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
INTERIOR RANGE
CONTROL
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
J
FIELD FIRING RANGE
UM 910148 – NORTH END OF CODY ROAD.
(7.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE IS A MULTI-PURPOSE FAMILIARIZATION RANGE
SMALL ARMS, MACHINE GUNS, MORTARS, MK-19 (TP-T ONLY),
AND DIRECT LAY ARTILLERY
TARGETS INCLUDE: AUTO BODIES, BARRELS, TANK HULLS,
ROCK PILES, AND APCs PRESENTLY IN THE IMPACT AREA.
SPECIFIC TARGET REQUIREMENTS MUST BE COORDINATED
WITH RANGE CONTROL.
23 TOTAL FIRING POINTS.
FP-1 HAS 8 FIRING POINTS
FP-2 HAS 15 FRING POINTS
343 DEGREES MAGNETIC FOR SMALL ARMS UP TO .50 CAL.
352 DEGREES MAGNETIC FOR SMALL ARMS UP TO .50 CAL.
310 DEGREES MAGNETIC FOR SMALL ARMS UP TO .50 CAL.
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY ORDINATE PERMISSIBLE FOR .50 CAL.
AND BELOW, OTHER WEAPON SYSTEMS REQUIRE AN RC FORM
1 FROM RANGE CONTROL.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
IN CENTER OF THE RANGE
TEMPORARY BARRIERS WILL BE PUT IN PLACE BY RANGE
CONTROL, AT THE TOP OF THE HILL. UNIT MUST POST
BARRIER GUARDS WHEN FIRING.
AT ENDS OF FIRING LINE PREVENTING PERSONNEL FROM
ADVANCING AHEAD OF THE FIRING LINE, OR INTO BACK BLAST
AREA, WHILE FIRING IS BEING CONDUCTED.
ALL FIRING MUST BE CONTROLLED SO THAT ALL ROUNDS ARE
DIRECTED INTO THE IMPACT AREA BETWEEN THE LEFT AND
RIGHT LIMITS. OIC OR RSO MUST HAVE A COMPASS TO VERIFY
LIMITS LISTED ON THE APPROPRIATE SDZ OVERLAY
INFORMATION CARD.
TWO UNITS (OR TWO WEAPON SYSTEMS) CAN OCCUPY THIS
RANGE AT ONE TIME, ONE ON FP1, AND THE OTHER ON FP2.
WHEN TWO UNITS ARE ON THE RANGE AT THE SAME TIME,
THEY MUST TELL RANGE CONTROL WHICH FIRING POINT THEY
ARE ON, WHEN SENDING THEIR OPENING CHECKLIST.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
114
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
115
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LIMIT MARKERS
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
TARGET BLDG
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
K
FIELD FIRE RANGE
UM 912233-LOCATED ON CASSINO ROAD, NORTH OF OP-15.
(12.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE IS SITUATED IN AN OPEN FIELD UTILIZING
STATIONARY TARGETS AT VARIOUS DISTANCES INTO THE
LEACH IMPACT AREA. THE RANGE ALSO HAS A 10M/25M
ZERO/TRANSITION FIRING LINE.
ALL SMALL ARMS, 40MM (TP ONLY), BFV, MORTAR, AT-4,
DRAGON GUIDED MISSILE (TRAINING AND HEAT), JAVELIN
(INERT ONLY), AND TOW (INERT ONLY).
TARGETS INCLUDE AUTO BODIES, BARRELS, TANK HULLS,
ROCK PILES, AND APCs PRESENTLY IN THE TARGET AREA.
PORTABLE TARGET STANDS WITH COROPLAST BACKING ARE
ON SITE FOR THE ZERO/TRANSITION FIRING LINE.
LOCATED ON THE CEMENT PAD
01 DEGREE MAGNETIC
SEE SDZ LAYOUT FOR LIMITS OF FIRE
WEAPON SPECIFIC MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT PERSONNEL FROM ADVANCING
AHEAD OF THE FIRING LINE, AND FROM ENTERING SPECIFIC
WEAPON BACKBLAST AREAS.
THE CLFX AND IPBC RANGES CLOSE THIS RANGE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
116
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
117
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
AMMUNITION STORAGE
BUNKER
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
L
ENGINEER DEMOLITION RANGE
UM 902144-WEST OF CODY ROAD AND BARRIER 29.
(7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
DEMOLITION TRAINING AREA TO SUPPORT METAL CUTTING,
CRATERING, AND ABATTIS. CONTAINS A BUNKER WITH
VIEWING PORTS.
ALL DEMOLITIONS UP TO 200 LBS.
ANY SPECIFIC REQUIREMENTS NEED TO BE COORDINATED
WITH RANGE CONTROL.
NA
NA
SEE MAP
SEE MAP
NA
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
EMPLACE TO ENSURE PERSONNEL DO NOT ENTER DANGER
AREA WHILE FIRING.
LARGE CHARGES, 100 LBS. OR LARGER, WILL BE DETONATED
IN THE LARGE CHARGE AREA ONLY. MAX. CHARGE IS 200 LBS.
REPORT ANY DAMAGED VIEWING PORTS IN OBSERVATION
BUNKER.
A 5-MINUTE-TO-INITIATION WARNING MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EACH TASK.
REMARKS
A ONE MINUTE-TO-BLAST WARNING CALL MUST BE MADE TO
RANGE CONTROL FOR EVERY BLAST. ALSO NOTIFY RANGE
CONTROL AFTER BLAST IS COMPLETE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
118
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
119
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
M
25M ZERO/SHOTGUN QUAL/
SCALED SRTR MORTAR RANGE
UM 915133-LOCATED ON NORMANDY ROAD.
(6.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS A SCALED SHORT RANGE TRAINING ROUND
MORTAR RANGE, AS WELL AS A 16 LANE 25M AND 35M ZERO
LINES.
SHOTGUN; 9MM-7.62MM BALL; MORTAR SRTR ROUNDS
SCALED TARGETS AT 100, 150, 200, 300, 350, 400, 500, AND 600
METERS
100 METER FRONT
171 DEGREES MAGNETIC
185 DEGREES MAGNETIC
157 DEGREES MAGNETIC
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY ORDINATE PERMISSIBLE
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
IN CENTER OF RANGE
N/A
IF 7.62MM MATCH GRADE AMMO IS BEING FIRED ON A-1 KD
RANGE, THIS RANGE CANNOT BE OCCUPIED.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
120
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
121
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
122
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
MK-19
MK-19 MULTI-PURPOSE GUNNERY RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 925232-LOCATED ON CASSINO ROAD.
(12.4 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THE RANGE OFFERS PRACTICE TARGET OBSERVATION, FIRE
ADJUSTMENT, TRAVERSING, SEARCHING, AND OBTAINING AN
ACCURATE TARGET FOR BOTH GROUND AND VEHICLE
MOUNTED WEAPONS.
MK-19 40 MM TP ONLY
400m APC; 600m APC; 600m TROOPS (TP ONLY); 800m TANK;
800m TROOPS (TP ONLY); 1100m TANK; 1500m CEV
50 METER
12 DEGREES MAGNETIC
RED/WHITE PANEL-22 DEGREES MAGNETIC
BLACK/WHITE PANEL-353 DEGREES MAGNETIC
15 DEGREES
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
HIGH EXPLOSIVE ROUNDS ARE UNAUTHORIZED FOR THIS
RANGE. OP-7 and OP-23 ARE THE ONLY AUTHORIZED RANGES
FOR MK-19 40 MM HE ROUNDS.
OIC AND RSO WILL BE FAMILIAR WITH FM 23-27 MK-19
GRENADE MACHINE GUN.
REPORT ALL DUD ROUNDS TO RANGE CONTROL WITH
CLOSING CHECKLIST.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
123
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
124
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
VEHICLES AVAILABLE ON
SITE
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
R
VEHICLE RECOVERY SITE
UM 926055-NORTH OF CHICKAMAGUA ROAD, WEST OF SOUTH
GETTYSBURG ROAD. (3.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
TYPE OF RECOVERY ACTIVITIES AVAILABLE AT SITE:
UPRIGHT AND OVERTURNED WHEELED AND TRACKED
VEHICLES. AKERRS (ALLIED KINETIC ENERGY RECOVERY
ROPE SYSTEM) PIT. NOSED IN VEHICLE (WHEELED AND
TRACKED). TOW WHEELED AND TRACKED VEHICLE (CROSSCOUNTRY). LIFT AND SWING LOAD. MIRED WHEELED AND
TRACKED VEHICLE (RECOVERY PIT).
M-60 TANK(2), M880,TRK,UTIL(1), M151A2TRK, CRG(1) ,M54 (1)
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NONE
N/A
TRACK VEHICLE RECOVERY REQUIRES AN INDIVIDUAL WITH A
VALID DA FORM 348 FOR M60 SERIES TRACK VEHICLE
OPERATION.
THE RANGE PACKET AND THE KEYS FOR THE RANGE GATE,
BUILDING, AND EQUIPMENT LOCATED ON THE RANGE WILL BE
SIGNED FOR AT RTS-MAINTENANCE SUPPLY SECTION, BLDG
11-200.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
ALL COORDINATION FOR THIS RANGE WILL BE DONE
THROUGH RTSM. SAME DAY REQUEST IS NOT AUTHORIZED
THROUGH RANGE CONTROL, CONTACT RTSM.
THE RECOVERY RANGE IS REQUESTED THROUGH RFMSS,
ONCE INPUTTED, CONTACT RTSM WITH A PLAN, UPON
APPROVAL RTSM WILL NOTIFY THE RFMSS SCHEDULER TO
RESERVE THE RANGE.
125
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
126
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
LEFT LIMIT
RIGHT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RADIO FREQUENCIES
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
SCALED RANGE
UM 9021806969 - TA05: FIELD TO THE SOUTH OF FERRELL LAKE.
(3.22 MILES WEST OF RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE OFFERS THE ABILITY FOR MOUNTED WEAPON
SYSTEMS TO USE TRAINING DEVICES (I.E. MILES, PGS, TWGSS,
ETC.) ALLOWING COMMANDERS THE ABILITY TO TRAIN CREWS
PRIOR TO MOUNTED LIVE FIRE TRAINING EVENTS.
BLANK ONLY
EIGHT STATIONARY TARGET LIFTERS AND TWO MOVING
TARGETS. TARGET LIFTERS CAN BE PLACED ANYWHERE ON
THE RANGE FROM 100-1200 METERS. CURRENT MOVING
TARGET LOCATION IS AT 600 METERS. TARGETS ARE ¼ AND ½
SCALES.
N/A
N/A
N/A
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
N/A
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
ADMIN: 40.025
FIRING: 32.050
JUMP: 41.550
TARGET MATRIX MUST BE SUBMITTED TO AUTOMATED
TARGET SYSTEMS 120 DAYS PRIOR.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
127
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
SEAL CABIN
NON-STANDARD SMALL ARMS RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
UM 902261-NORTH FROM BARRIER 68.
(17.5 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE CONSISTS OF A RANCH STYLE CABIN SITUATED IN
A WILDERNESS AREA. NUMEROUS SCENARIOS CAN BE
CONDUCTED AT THIS SITE.
PISTOL, SHOTGUN, 5.56MM, 7.62MM, AND DEMOLITIONS
PAPER SILHOUTTE TARGETS CAN BE OBTAINED THROUGH
RANGE CONTROL. REMOTE CONTROLLED TARGETRY NEEDS
TO BE COORDINATED THROUGH AUTOMATED TARGET
SYSTEMS (ATS), 320-616-3132/3133.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT
5.56MM, 360-DEGREE SWING SDZ IS ALLOWED, UPON PRIOR
APPROVAL FROM RANGE CONTROL.
SCENARIO DEPENDENT
SCENARIO DEPENDENT
SCENARIO AND AMMUNITION DEPENDENT
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
NO
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
NONE
SCENARIO DEPENDENT
ALL SCENARIOS MUST BE SUBMITTED TO RANGE CONTROL
NLT 90 DAYS PRIOR TO SCHEDULED USAGE.
OIC AND RSO REQUIRED FOR BLANKS, SIMUNITIONS, AND
GAS.
REMARKS
NO FIRING AT THE CEILING OR ROOF.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
128
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
129
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE ROAD
GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UAC
URBAN ASSAULT COURSE
UM 92581674-LOCATED ON NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD BETWEEN
NORTH RANGE AND B-2. (7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
This facility is used to train individual Soldiers, squads, and platoons on tasks
necessary to operate within a built-up/urban area.
Primary features include—
Station 1: Individual and Team Trainer. This station is a three-room trainer
where team leaders and squad leaders train the basics of building and room
clearing.
Station 2: Squad and Platoon Trainer. This station is a four-structure trainer
with multiple rooms. Squads build upon tasks learned at Station 1 and begin
to learn the concepts of clearing multiple buildings. The station is designed in
such a way that it can be used as individual buildings with a narrow street or
as rooms inside a building with a long connecting hallway.
Station 3: Grenadier Gunnery Trainer. This station is a live-fire station where
M203 gunners master target engagements in an urban area, move tactically,
and respond to the fire commands.
Station 4: Offense/Defense House. This station is where a platoon can train to
attack and/or defend a building. This station can also be divided into a number
of smaller training stations to reinforce training or to train tasks not yet trained
at the other stations.
Station 5: Underground Trainer. This station provides training for subterranean
operations.
5.56MM AND 40MM TP
PROVIDED ON THE RANGE
283 DEGREES MAGNETIC
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY PER AMMUNITION
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM BUILDING ON NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND
SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
YES-ACROSS NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD. TWO EACH, WITH 40
PERSON CAPACITY.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE CONTROL.
HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO MUST BE
CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
N/A
THIS RANGE MUST BE PLACED INTO CHECKFIRE STATUS FOR NORTH
RANGE TARGET MAINTENANCE
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, PHONE # 3132/3133
RANGE CONTROL HAS MAGAZINES AVAILABLE FOR HAND RECEIPT TO
MILITARY UNITS.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES PRIOR
TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR HAULING
TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION, OR TO CANTONMENT
TRASH RECEPTACLES.
130
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
131
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM / MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
Viking Ski Trail
FROM DE PARQ WOODS TO THE CODY ROAD ENTRANCE OF
THE F RANGE BIATHLON TRAIL NETWORK
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
N/A
NO COMMUNICATION REQUIREMENTS FOR USE OF THIS TRAIL
HOWEVER, USING UNIT MUST STOP BY RANGE CONTROL AND
CHECK IN WITH THE NUMBER OF PERSONNEL UPON ENTERING
AND CHECK OUT UPON EXITING.
RANGE CONTROL PHONE#: 320.616.3134/3137
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
SKIING ON THE DOWN RANGE PORTION OF THE TRAIL IS
PERMITTED DURING RANGE CONTROL HOURS OF OPERATION
ONLY. SKIIERS MUST SIGN IN AND OUT AT RANGE CONTROL.
THEY MUST ALSO READ AND SIGN A WAIVER OF LIABILITY
AGREEMENT.
SKIIERS ARE RESPONSIBLE FOR KEEPING THE TRAIL NEAT
AND CLEAN.
132
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
133
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
W-1
FERRELL LAKE PONTOON BRIDGE SITE
UM 904075-LOCATED ON THE SOUTH SIDE OF FERRELL LAKE.
(3.2 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS SITE PROVIDES A LAKE SITE FOR BRIDGE AND
AMPHIBIOUS SWIM TRAINING.
167 METERS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
OIC AND RSO MUST BE ON SAFETY MEMORANDUM FILED AT
RANGE CONTROL (SEE TABLE 1-1, TAB K). MEDICAL AID
PERSONNEL MUST BE ON THE RANGE. OIC AND RSO MUST BE
FAMILIAR WITH CHAPTER 2.
THE RANGE CAN BE USED FOR VEHICLE SWIMMING AND
PONTOON BRIDGING. THE UNIT PROVIDES ALL EQUIPMENT.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
134
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
135
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
LENGTH
LATRINE FACILITIES
STORAGE BLDG
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
W-2
MISSISSIPPI RIVER RIBBON BRIDGE SITE
UM 937124-LOCATED ON EAST BOUNDARY ROAD, ON THE
MISSISSIPPI RIVER. (4.1 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS SITE IS CONSIDERED A FAST WATER SITE FOR RIBBON
BRIDGE TRAINING, AND IS UNIQUE IN THE UNITED STATES.
116 METERS FROM SUPPORT RAMP TO SUPPORT RAMP.
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
NONE
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
OIC AND RSO MUST BE ON SAFETY MEMORANDUM FILED AT
RANGE CONTROL (SEE TABLE 1-1, TAB K). MEDICAL AID
PERSONNEL MUST BE ON THE RANGE. OIC AND RSO MUST BE
FAMILIAR WITH CHAPTER 2.
THE MISSISSIPPI RIVER VARIES GREATLY IN RATE OF FLOW,
DEPENDING ON THE SEASON AND CURRENT WEATHER
CONDITIONS. CURRENT DATA CAN BE OBTAINED FROM
MINNESOTA POWER (1-800-228-4966).
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
136
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
137
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
MILLER COMPLEX
NORTH, EAST, CENTER,
AND WEST RANGES
Automated Tower Radio Frequencies
East Range
1) Admin Frequency: 34.825
2) Firing Frequency: 32.725
3) Jump Frequency: 36.425
4) BFT/TAC Net: 38.725
5) Alternate Frequency: 49.975
Center Range
1) Admin Frequency: 36.700
2) Firing Frequency: 34.500
3) Jump Frequency: 40.550
4) BFT/TAC Net: 41.975
5) Alternate Frequency: 46.650
West Range
1) Admin Frequency: 34.250
2) Firing Frequency: 30.000
3) Jump Frequency: 38.250
4) BFT/TAC Net: 41.000
5) Alternate Frequency: 36.050
138
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
139
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
NORTH RANGE (NRG)
MULTI-PURPOSE MACHINE GUN RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 924166-LOCATED ON NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD. PART OF
THE E.B. MILLER COMPLEX. (7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE HAS 6 LANES; LANES 2-5 HAVE TARGETS OUT TO
1500M.
25MM, .50 CAL., 7.62MM, and 5.56MM
PROVIDED ON THE RANGE
6 FIRING POINTS-EITHER GROUND OR VEHICLE MOUNTED
WEAPONS.
283 DEGREES MAGNETIC
RED/WHITE PANEL
BLACK/WHITE PANEL
MAXIMUM TRAJECTORY PER AMMUNITION
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM BUILDING ON NORTH GETTYSBURG
ROAD
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
NO
YES-ACROSS NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD. TWO EACH, WITH
40 PERSON CAPACITY.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
AS REQUIRED TO PREVENT PERSONNEL FROM ADVANCING
AHEAD OF THE FIRING LINE.
THIS RANGE CAN ONLY BE FIRED FROM THE ESTABLISHED
FIRING LINE. IF THE B-1 RANGE IS FIRING, NO PERSONNEL ARE
ALLOWED TO GO WEST OF THE FIRING LINE.
IF TARGET MAINTENANCE IS REQUIRED DURING RANGE
OPERATIONS, B-1 AND THE UAC MUST BE PLACED INTO
CHECKFIRE STATUS PRIOR TO ANY DOWNRANGE MOVEMENT.
FOR TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, 320-616-3132/3133
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
140
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
141
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE FREQUENCIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
INTERIOR RANGE
CONTROL
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
EAST RANGE (ERG)
MULTI-PURPOSE TRAINING RANGE
UM 895135-LOCATED IN THE E.B. MILLER COMPLEX ON
NORMANDY ROAD. (6.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS RANGE OFFERS TANK AND BFV QUALIFICATION TABLES
IV-XII. THE RANGE CAN SUPPORT A MLRS OPAREA.
120 MM, 25 MM, 20 MM, TOW (inert), 50 CAL., 7.62 MM, 5.56 MM.
DOUBLE E SILHOUETTES AND ARMOR TARGETS.
4 MANEUVER LANES, 16 DEFENSE POSITIONS & FIRING
POINTS.
3 DEGREES MAGNETIC
VARIOUS TRPS WITH ORANGE ARROW.
VARIOUS TRPS WITH ORANGE ARROW.
5° FOR TANKS, 15° FOR BFVs, AND MAX ORDINATE FOR .50 CAL.
AND BELOW.
YES-IN THE CLASSROOM
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
YES
YES
YES-40 PERSON CAPACITY
ADMIN: 47.80
FIRING: 30.50
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
UPPER TOWER FIELD PHONE: 7095
LOWER TOWER FIELD PHONE: 7096
CLASSROOM FIELD PHONE: 7068
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE RANGE ENTRANCE
USING UNIT WILL POST GATE GUARD AT THE TOWER GATE
WHEN THE RANGE IS HOT.
AS NEEDED ELSEWHERE AROUND THE RANGE PERIMETER
NORMANDY ROAD CLOSED. ALTERNATE ROUTE IS SOUTH (OR
NORTH) ON CODY ROAD, TO LLANO GRANDE, TO THE RANGE
ROAD.
AMMO SUPPLY POINT AND REFUELING POINT MUST BE
SEPARATED BY AT LEAST 300 METERS.
TARGET MATRIX MUST BE SUBMITTED TO RANGE CONTROL
120 DAYS IN ADVANCE.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
142
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
143
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
CENTER RANGE (CRG)
MULTI-PURPOSE MACHINE GUN RANGE
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
TARGET REQUIREMENTS
FIRING LINE
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FIRE
RIGHT LIMIT
LEFT LIMIT
MAX ELEVATION OF FIRE
LATRINE FACILITIES
TARGET BLDG
AMMO SUPPLY POINT
CLASSROOM
RANGE FREQUENCIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
CONTROL TOWER-UM885125.
MACHINEGUN FIRING POINT-UM 884136.
(7.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL ON NORMANDY ROAD)
THIS RANGE CONSISTS OF A MULTI-PURPOSE MACHINEGUN
QUALIFICATION COURSE (INCLUDING SNIPER RIFLES).
5.56MM, 7.62MM, .50 CAL
DOUBLE E SILHOUETTE OR PORTABLE TARGET STANDS
6 MACHINEGUN LANES AT THE FIRING POINT NORTH OF
NORMANDY RD. LANES 3 AND 4 HAVE TARGETS AT 1000
METERS. LANES 1 AND 6 HAVE 1500 METER TARGETS.
3 DEGREES MAGNETIC
FLOURESCENT ORANGE PANEL
FLOURESCENT GREEN PANEL
MAXIMUM ORDINATE FOR MACHINEGUNS
LATRINES LOCATED WITHIN THE CLASSROOM.
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
NO
NO
YES- TA 23; GRID LOCATION UM 88291202
ADMIN: 51.45
FIRING:38.00
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
TELEPHONE: 3137/3134
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE REQUIRED. RADIO
MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
AT THE MAIN TOWER, AND ON NORMANDY ROAD
N/A
NORMANDY ROAD IS CLOSED WHEN UTILIZING THE MANUEVER
LANES SOUTH OF NORMANDY ROAD.
TOWER OPERATOR IS PROVIDED BY AUTOMATED TARGET
SYSTEMS (ATS) IF REQUESTED.
TARGETRY PROBLEMS CALL ATS, PHONE # 3132/3133.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
RANGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION
144
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
145
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
WEST RANGE (WRG)
MULTI-PURPOSE MACHINE GUN RANGE/HEAVY SNIPER LANE
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
UM 865145-INTERSECTION OF NORMANDY ROAD AND BATAAN
ROAD. (9.7 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
This range is used to train and test Soldiers on the skills necessary to
zero, detect, identify, engage, and defeat stationary and moving
infantry targets along with stationary armor targets in a tactical array
using the M249 squad automatic weapon (SAW), M60 MG, M240B
MG, MK19, M24 sniper weapon system, M110 semi-automatic sniper
system and the M2 MG.
Primary features include—
98 stationary infantry targets.
24 double target arm – stationary infantry targets.
24 moving infantry targets emplacements.
20 stationary armor targets.
10 firing lanes.
10 Target boots.
20 iron maiden targets
Note: 26 stationary infantry emplacements are widened to support two
target mechanisms.
All targets are fully automated and the event-specific target scenario is
computer-driven and scored from the tower. The range operating
system is fully capable of providing immediate performance feedback
to the using participants.
Associated range operations and control facilities:
Standard SAROCA facilities
Requirement document: FM 3-22.27, FM 3-22.10, FM 3-22.65, FM
3-22.68
Additional information: Targets beyond 1,000 meters can be battery
powered/radio controlled. All
stationary/moving infantry target mechanisms are equipped with
muzzle flash simulators. Target boots
will be placed 10 meters from the baseline.
RANGE IS CURRENTLY UNDER CONSTRUCTION
146
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
147
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TACTICAL TRAINING
BASES (TTB)
INCLUDING COMBAT OUTPOSTS
148
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
NORTH RANGE ENTRY CONTROL POINT
(NRG ECP)
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
LATRINE FACILITIES
CLASSROOM/MESSHALL
FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
UM 93091673-WEST OF THE CODY ROAD/EAST BOUNDARY
ROAD INTERSECTION. (7.6 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
ENTRY CONTROL POINT TRAINING
BLANKS ONLY
IN CLASSROOM BUILDING, OR PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE
REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY AND SERVICES DIV, 320-6163128/3130.
YES: 2 CLASSROOMS-40 PERSON CAPACITY EACH
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: MAY BE HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
UNIT WILL NOT CLOSE NORTH GETTYSBURG ROAD WHEN
CREATING A TEMPORARY TACTICAL TRAINING BASE.
OTHER UNITS MUST BE ALLOWED EASE OF ACCESS TO B-1,
NORTH, AND B-2 RANGES; AND WILL NOT BE SUBJECTED TO
ANY SCENARIO TRAINING BEING CONDUCTED BY THE
OCUPPYING UNIT.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
149
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
150
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
Y-1
POW CAMP/TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
UM 936079-LOCATED ON ARGONNE ROAD.
(1.0 MILE FROM RANGE CONTROL)
THIS SITE PROVIDES TRAINING ON HANDLING AND
CONTROLLING PRISONERS OF WAR, OR DETENTION OF
PERSONNEL IN A SECURED ENVIRONMET. COMPOUND
CONSISTS OF FENCED AREAS WITH TOWER PLATFORMS AND
TIN HUTS. THE RANGE CAN ALSO BE UTILIZED AS A COMBAT
OUTPOST.
SIMUNITIONS, BLANK AMMUNITION, AND PYROTECHNICS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE
PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
NO GRAY WATER DUMPING OR MKTs ALLOWED ON THIS
RANGE
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
151
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
152
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
Y-2 EAST
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
UM 90560539 AND UM 89730600-LOCATED ON BULL RUN AND
SHILOH ROADS, IN TA 3. (3.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPOUND PERIMETERS ARE HESCO BASKET WALLS.
INFRASTRUCTURE INCLUDES 2 ECPs EACH, TOWER
PLATFORMS, AND TIN HUTS. RANGE ALSO HAS AN OE-254
ANTENNA MAST AND “BIG VOICE/SIREN” SPEAKER SYSTEM.
SIMUNITIONS, BLANK AMMUNITION, AND PYROTECHNICS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
GRAY WATER FACILITIES ARE IN PLACE FOR MKTs AND
SHOWERING. OBTAIN THE WRENCH FROM RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CALL RANGE CONTROL FOR PUMPING GRAY
WATER.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
(SEE MAP ON PAGE A-158)
153
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
Y-2 WEST
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
UM 90560539 AND UM 89730600-LOCATED ON BULL RUN AND
SHILOH ROADS, IN TA 3. (3.8 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPOUND PERIMETERS ARE HESCO BASKET WALLS.
INFRASTRUCTURE INCLUDES 2 ECPs EACH, TOWER
PLATFORMS, AND TIN HUTS. RANGE ALSO HAS AN OE-254
ANTENNA MAST AND “BIG VOICE/SIREN” SPEAKER SYSTEM.
SIMUNITIONS, BLANK AMMUNITION, AND PYROTECHNICS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
GRAY WATER FACILITIES ARE IN PLACE FOR MKTs AND
SHOWERING. OBTAIN THE WRENCH FROM RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CALL RANGE CONTROL FOR PUMPING GRAY
WATER.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
(SEE MAP ON PAGE A-158)
154
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
155
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
TYPE AMMUNITION
AUTHORIZED
CLASSROOM
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
Y-4
TACTICAL TRAINING BASE
UM 95462646-LOCATED ON CHORWAN ROAD, IN TA 64.
(14 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL)
COMPOUND HAS ELECTRIC POWER INSTALLED. PERIMETER
STYLE IS DIRT BERM. GRAY WATER DRAIN FIELD AND
MAINTENANCE PADS ARE INSTALLED. UNIT WILL HAVE TO
SUPPLY TENTAGE TO SIMULATE BUILDINGS. OE-254 ANTENNA
MAST IS LOCATED ON THE IED-D LANE.
SIMUNITIONS, BLANK AMMUNITION, AND PYROTECHNICS
NO
PORTABLE TOILETS MUST BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
N/A
GRAY WATER FACILITIES ARE IN PLACE FOR MKTs AND
SHOWERING. OBTAIN THE WRENCH FROM RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CALL RANGE CONTROL FOR PUMPING GRAY
WATER.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
156
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
157
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB B
RISK MANAGEMENT
Appendix B offers the current form used to calculate the risk involved in any training exercise. All
personnel in leadership positions should be familiar with Composite Risk Management (CRM) Worksheet
(DA Form 7566) procedures. Leaders are encouraged to use these forms along with common sense to
determine the risk and safety of all exercises. A CRM is required to be turned into Range Control prior to
going down range and is a requirement for all downrange activities. On live-fire ranges it is an inspectable
item that Range Control personnel look for while conducting safety inspections.
1
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
2
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
3
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB C
ACCIDENT AND INCIDENT
REPORTING
These forms are designed to aid Range Control in the investigation of accidents and
incidents. Use them as a general guideline to follow. Complete all areas and questions
that apply.
4
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE ACCIDENT/INCIDENT CHECKLIST
Vehicle / Barrier / Training Area
DATE_______________________
1. Notify Range Control: SINCGARS 36.100, Motorola radio, or Telephone 320-616-3137/3134.
2. Report the nature of accident/incident and have information available.
 Vehicle accident/incident
Date and time of incident: _____________________________________________________
Type of accident/incident: _____________________________________________________
Personnel injured:
Yes
No
Vehicle damage:
Yes
No
Grid: ______________________________________________________
Activity being conducted: _____________________________________________________
Name of individual and unit reporting: ___________________________________________
 Barrier breach
Barrier # ____________or Grid:_______________ Damaged:
Yes No
Date and time of incident: _____________________________________________________
Duration in area: ____________________________________________________________
Number and type of vehicles involved: ___________________________________________
Number of personnel involved: _________________________________________________
Name and unit of individual in charge: ___________________________________________
 Damage to Training Area or property
Damage was caused by:
Tracked Vehicle Wheeled Vehicle
Troop use
Fire
Other _______________________
Training Area #_______ and Grid_______________________________
Approximate amount of damage:________________________________
Engineer equipment required: YES
NO
TYPE:____________________
Personnel reporting and unit.: __________________________________________________
3. Stand by for instructions from Range Control.
4. If accident/incident warrants investigation, Range Control may request unit to submit ATS Form
285-AB-R (Accident/Incident Report). See page C-5.
5
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE INCIDENT CHECKLIST
Indirect Fire
1. Immediately place the firing point in Cease Fire Freeze status.
2. All personnel will fall away from weapons without changing settings.
3. Notify Range Control on SINCGARS 36.100 immediately and give the following
information:
 Name of unit. ______________________________________________________
 Grid location of weapon round was fired from _____________________________
 Type and size of round ______________________________________________
 Azimuth, Elevation, and Charge _______________________________________
Round was:
 Out of Safe
 Unobserved
 Name and Rank of person reporting incident _____________________________
4. OIC investigates to determine:
 Personnel injured _______________________________________________
 Equipment Damage _____________________________________________
 General direction (out of limit) that weapon was fired ____________________
 Number of rounds fired ___________________________________________
 Personnel were forward of established firing position
 Number of personnel forward of firing position _________________________
 Reason forward of position ________________________________________
5. Stand by for instructions from Range Control investigating.
6. If accident/incident warrants investigation, Range Control may request unit
to submit ATS Form 285-AB-R (Accident/Incident Report). See page C-5.
7. Firing will be resumed upon approval from Range Control.
6
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE INCIDENT CHECKLIST
Direct Fire
1. Immediately place the firing point in Cease Fire Freeze status.
2. All personnel will fall away from weapons without changing settings.
3. Notify Range Control: SINCGARS 36.100, Motorola radio, or Telephone 320-6163137/3134:
 Range Designation: ______________________________________________
 Name of unit: ___________________________________________________
 Name and rank of person reporting incident: __________________________
 Type of incident: ________________________________________________
 OIC investigation results: _________________________________________
4. OIC investigates to determine:
 Personnel injured _______________________________________________
 Equipment Damage _____________________________________________
 General direction (out of limit) that weapon was fired ____________________
 Number of rounds fired ___________________________________________
 Personnel were forward of established firing position
 Number of personnel forward of firing position _________________________
 Reason forward of position ________________________________________
5. Stand by for instructions from Range Control.
6. If accident/incident warrants investigation, Range Control may request unit
to submit ATS Form 285-AB-R (Accident/Incident Report). See page C-5.
7. Firing will resume upon approval from Range Control.
7
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
ACCIDENT / INCIDENT REPORT
(Items derived from DA Form 285-AB-R JUL 94)
1. DATE / TIME OF ACCIDENT / INCIDENT (1):_____________________________________________
2. UNIT (5):__________________________________________________________
3. LOCATION OF ACCIDENT / INCIDENT (6):______________________________________________
4. MISSION (BRIEF DESCRIPTION) (8):___________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
5. INDIVIDUAL(S) INVOLVED (11):
NAME (LAST, FIRST, MI)
SOCIAL SEC. #
GRADE
6. WERE PERSONNEL HOSPITALIZED? (21)
YES / NO (CIRCLE ONE)
SEX
AGE
7. DESCRIBE ACCIDENT/INCIDENT (24):_________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
8. WAS ACCIDENT / INCIDENT CAUSED BY (CIRCLE ALL THAT APPLY) (37):
LEADER
TRAINING
STANDARDS/PROCEDURES
SUPPORT
INDIVIDUAL
DESCRIBE:__________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
9. CORRECTIVE ACTIONS TAKEN OR PLANNED (40):______________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
__________________________________________________________________________________
10. POC FOR INFORMATION ON ACCIDENT / INCIDENT (41):_______________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________
(INCLUDE NAME, RANK, POSITION, UNIT, HOR, AND PHONE NUMBERS)
(NUMBERS IN PARENTHESES ARE THE LINE ITEM NUMBER ON DA FORM 285-AB-R)
ATS FORM 285-AB-R (DEC 2001)
8
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB D
Range Control Contact Information
EMERGENCY INFO
1
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RANGE CONTROL
CONTACT INFORMATION
SINCGARS RADIO FREQUENCIES
PRIMARY
ALTERNATE
36.100
36.900
MOTOROLA HAND HELD
CHANNEL
1
COMMERCIAL PHONE
(320) 616-3134
CELL PHONE
(320) 412-6078
(320) 412-6075
STOP IN AT RANGE CONTROL TO PICK UP A COPY OF THE
DAILY RANGE BULLETIN PRIOR TO GOING DOWN RANGE.
IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY:
“DO NOT CALL 911!! CONTACT RANGE CONTROL”
All MEDEVACs have radio net priority. All MEDEVACS will
be initiated through Range Control, utilizing the CRTC
MEDEVAC SOP.
SECURITY:
(320) 632-7375
2
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB E
ZULU MAST Map
3
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Mast
Z-1
Z-2
Z-3
Z-4
Z-5
Z-6
Z-7
Z-8
Z-9
Z-10
Z-11
Z-12
Location
Range Control Office
A-1
Training Area 61
Training Area 64
Training Area 71
Training Area 69
OP 16
OP 15
Training Area 54
Training Area 40
OP 1
Range Control Office
4
Coordinates
UM 95370686
UM 91990868
UM 95082437
UM 95512711
UM 88122886
UM 86802508
UM 90142468
UM 91332287
UM 87102204
UM 85381612
UM 91001464
UM 95370686
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB F
Improved Landing Areas Map
1
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
HELIPAD NO.
X-1
X-2
X-2A
X-3
X-4
X-5
X-5A
X-6
X-6A
X-7
X-8
X-9
X-10
X-10A
X-11
X-12
X-12A
GRID LOCATION.
UM 956054 (MUTF)
UM 935090 (TA 13)
UM 922084 (TA 9)
UM 937125 (TA 28)
UM 924177 (TA 34)
UM 929229 (TA 58)
UM 958273 (TA 64)
UM 882251 (TA 68)
UM 884290 (TA 72)
UM 875221 (TA 55)
UM 855164 (TA 40)
UM 869136 (TA 40)
UM 890135 (TA 38)
UM 902125 (TA 25)
UM 898061 (TA 3)
UM 941057 (Air Field)
UM 954066 (Range Control)
LATITUDE / LONGITUDE
460534.05N
0942100.48W
460737.45N
0942240.89W
460718.75N
0942345.62W
460924.73N
0942238.22W
461215.01N
0942238.22W
461502.10N
0942323.61W
461726.31N
0942105.07W
461616.69N
0942703.63W
461823.39N
0942659.90W
461426.74N
0942744.06W
461131.14N
0942904.33W
461000.12N
0942808.28W
460959.55N
0942618.52W
460931.19N
0942521.69W
460559.65N
0942533.93W
460547.99N
0942212.14W
460623.69N
0942111.90W
2
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB G
Training Area Maps
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
2
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
3
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB H
Drop Zones
1
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
FLIGHT PATH DIRECTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
ARNO DZ
AIR DROP ZONE
UM 873249-INTERSECTION OF KODIAK ROAD AND ARNO ROAD.
18.3 MILES FROM RANGE CONTROL.
PROVIDES TRAINING ON AIR ASSAULT, AIRBORNE, AND
LOGISTICAL SUPPORT OPERATIONS. DROP ZONE IS 1100M
WIDE BY 1000M LONG.
SOUTH TO NORTH
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED.
RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
DZ CREW IS RESPONSIBLE FOR LIMITING ACCESS TO THE DZ
DURING AIRDROPS.
AVOID OVERFLYING FARMS TO THE WEST OF THE DROP ZONE.
PERSONAL FLOTATION DEVICES ARE REQUIRED FOR
PERSONNEL DROPS, DUE TO NUMEROUS PONDS LOCATED
WITHIN THE DZ.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
2
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
3
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
FLIGHT PATH DIRECTION
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
AIRFIELD INFORMATION
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
KALAHAR DZ
AIR DROP ZONE
MILLER ARMY AIRFIELD
PROVIDES TRAINING ON AIR ASSAULT, AIRBORNE, AND
LOGISTICAL SUPPORT OPERATIONS. DROP ZONE IS 600M
WIDE BY 1577M LONG.
SOUTHEAST TO NORTHWEST OR NORTHWEST TO SOUTHEAST
YES-INSIDE AIRFIELD OPERATIONS OFFICE
NA-ALL COMMUNICATIONS ARE CONTROLLED BY MILLER ARMY
AIRFIELD OPERATIONS OFFICE
ASSAULT STRIP HAS 2’ X 6’ PANELS MARKING BOTH SIDES OF
THE RUNWAY DOWN THE ENTIRE LENGTH. MAIN RUNWAY HAS
2’ TALL MARKER LIGHTS ON THE SHOULDERS, AS WELL AS
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT LOCATED AT VARIOUS POINTS ON
THE AIRFIELD. UNIT MUST BRIEF JUMPERS ON THESE
HAZARDS.
NA
THE AIR FORCE RECOMMENDS SINGLE SHIP VISUAL DROPS AS
THE DZ DOES NOT HAVE A SUFFICIENT WIDTH FOR
FORMATIONS OR SKE DROPS.
LEFT TRAFFIC IS RECOMMENDED TO AVOID ZMP R-4301 TO
THE NORTH OF THE DZ. MUST ALSO AVOID OVERFLYING
RANDALL, MN, WEST OF THE AIRFIELD.
REMARKS
AIRCRAFT MUST USE ASSAULT STRIP TO ENSURE JUMPERS
LAND SOUTH OF THE MAIN RUNWAY, TO AVOID AIRFIELD
NAVIGATION EQUIPMENT NORTH OF THE RUNWAY.
USE OF THIS DROP ZONE MUST BE COORDINATED THROUGH
CAMP RIPLEY OPERATIONS, 133 AW, MILLER ARMY AIRFIELD
OPERATIONS, AND CAMP RIPLEY RANGE CONTROL.
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
4
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
5
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
LOCATION
DESCRIPTION
GENERAL DIRECTION OF
FLIGHT PATH
LATRINE FACILITIES
RANGE CONTROL
COMMUNICATION
REQUIREMENTS
LOCATION OF RANGE
FLAG POLE
LOCATION OF RANGE
ROAD GUARDS
RESTRICTIONS
REMARKS
RIPLEY DZ
AIR DROP ZONE
UM 914135-NORTHEAST CORNER OF NORMANDY ROAD AND
CODY ROAD INTERSECTION. 6.6 MILES FROM RANGE
CONTROL.
PROVIDES TRAINING ON AIR ASSAULT, AIRBORNE, AND
LOGISTICAL SUPPORT OPERATIONS. DROP ZONE IS 1100
METERS WIDE BY 1100 METERS LONG.
SOUTHWEST TO NORTHEAST.
PORTABLE TOILETS MAY BE REQUESTED THROUGH SUPPLY
AND SERVICES DIV, 320-616-3128/3130.
SINCGARS: 36.100 PRIMARY, 36.900 ALTERNATE
TWO-WAY RADIO: HAND RECEIPTED WITH THE RANGE PACKET.
UNIT MUST OPEN AND CLOSE THE RANGE WITH RANGE
CONTROL. HOURLY COMMO CHECKS ARE NOT REQUIRED,
BUT RADIO MUST BE CONTINUOUSLY MONITORED.
N/A
ALL FOUR ROAD/TRAIL INTERSECTIONS WILL BE BARRICADED
ONE HOUR PRIOR TO TIME ON TARGET, TO ENSURE THAT
THERE ARE NO UNAUTHORIZED PERSONNEL ON THE DZ.
DZ CREW WILL CLOSE NORMANDY ROAD AT THE
APPROPRIATE TIME.
N/A
UNITS MUST CLEAN CLASSROOMS AND POLICE-CALL RANGES
PRIOR TO RANGE CLEARANCES. UNITS ARE RESPONSIBLE
FOR HAULING TRASH DIRECTLY TO THE TRANSFER STATION,
OR TO CANTONMENT TRASH RECEPTACLES.
6
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
7
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB I
Authorized White Light Road Map
1
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
2
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB J
Range Control Forms
Weapon Safety Certification Memo
Range Pre-Operation Checklist
Camp Ripley Exception to Policy Request
Camp Ripley Target Matrix
Request to Camp in the Field Training Area and/or Cantonment
Explosive Ordnance Incident REPO
Request for Utilization of Camp Ripley - ATS 23
3
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Weapon Safety Certification Memorandum
Training Center Support Unit
National Guard Training and Community Center
15000 Highway 115
Little Falls, MN 56345-0150
MNAG-TCSU
1 January 2009
MEMORANDUM FOR: RANGE CONTROL, CAMP RIPLEY, LITTLE FALLS, MN
SUBJECT: SAFETY CERTIFICATION
1. I certify that the following individuals have been trained, tested, and are weapons systems certified for
the weapons indicated.
2.
NAME
Doe, John S.
Smith, Robert
Johnson, Mark
GRADE/
RANK
E-7/SFC
E-6/SSG
E-5/SGT
SSNLAST FOUR
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
WEAPON SYSTEMS
M1A1, M2, M249, M9, Rappel Tower
M16A1, M9
M16A1, M9
JOHN T. HOME
LTC, IN, MNARNG
Battalion Commander
THIS IS A SAMPLE
The memorandum must include:
4
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
a. Grade/Rank requirements are found in Table 1-1, TAB K. ROTC Cadets, OCS Students, WOCs, or
any Officer or Warrant Officer who has not completed OBC/WOBC are not authorized to be OICs or
RSOs.
b. The specific weapon system(s) that the individual has been certified on.
c. The memorandum must be signed by an O-5 (O-4P) Commander or above.
RANGE PRE-OPERATION CHECKLIST
The Range Pre-Operation Checklist can be used as a guide to ensure the basic requirements of this
regulation are completed, prior to arrival at Camp Ripley, to conduct live-fire training.
COMPLETED BY THE TRAINING SECTION:
Range Assignment_______________________________ Date_________________ Time____________
Weapon(s) to be fired____________________________________________________
Course of fire__________________________________________________________
Number of personnel to fire______________ Number of rounds needed_________________
Coordination of transportation______________________________________________
COMPLETED BY THE COMPANY COMMANDER:
OICs and RSOs have completed the Battalion Range Safety Certification program__________________
OICs and RSOs are weapon systems certified:
YES
/
NO
Weapon Safety Certification Memorandum sent to Range Control by the Battalion on________________
COMPLETED BY THE OFFICER IN CHARGE (OIC):
Appoint a RSO (must be certified by the BN Commander)______________________________________
Appoint ARSOs as needed______________________________________________________________
Range Control Safety Briefing at Range Control is scheduled for_________________________________
Coordination for Medical Support has been completed_________________________________________
Coordination for Communication Equipment has been completed________________________________
Coordinated with Automated Target Systems for targets and materials, and has submitted any
scenario changes prior to range usage_____________________________________________________
COMPLETED BY THE RANGE SAFETY OFFICER (RSO):
Has a copy of the Camp Ripley Range Operations Appendix_______
Has a copy of all applicable FMs and TMs for the weapon systems being used_______
Has a range specific safety briefing prepared for firing and range support personnel________
5
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Camp Ripley Exception to Policy Request
UNIT:_______________________________
DATE:__________________________
MEMORANDUM FOR: Camp Ripley Range Control Office
SUBJECT: Exception to Policy
POLICY:
EXCEPTION TO POLICY:
DURATION OF THE EXCEPTION:________________________________________________________
REQUESTER’S PRINTED NAME, RANK, AND POSITION
SIGNATURE
1. THE ABOVE REQUEST IS:_________APPROVED _________DISAPPROVED
DATE:______________________________
2. COMMENTS:
______________________________________________________
RANGE CONTROL OFFICER
DISTRIBUTION:
6
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
REQUESTER-1
SHIFT SERGEANT-1
CAMP RIPLEY TARGET MATRIX
UNIT:
RANGE:
RANGE DATES:
FROM:
GUNNERY TABLE:
TASK/ EVENT
NUMBER
BATTLE
POSITION OR
LANE #
TO:
AMMO
DODIC
EXPOSURE
TIME AND HITS
TO KILL
REFERENCE:
RANGE TO
TARGETS
TARGET
REQUIREMENTS
TARGET AVAILABILITY
PRIMARY/ALT
PREPARED BY:
DATE:
SDZ CREATED BY:
DATE:
LEFT LIMIT:
RIGHT LIMIT:
GROUND VERIFIED BY:
DATE:
MATRIX VERIFIED BY:
DATE:
7
COMP STEP #
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
REQUEST TO CAMP IN THE FIELD
TRAINING AREA AND/OR CANTONMENT
I, ___________________________________________, am requesting to use the following (circle one):
Camp Commanders Cabin
Ferrell Lake
Rest Area #3
Round Lake Recreation Area w/FEMA Trailer (Please Circle):
Lake Alott Recreation Area w/FEMA Trailer (Please Circle):
Deparq Woods w/FEMA Trailer (Please Circle):
Sylvan Dam Recreation Area
YES
/
NO
YES / NO
YES / NO
I will use the facility:
From (Date/Time):___________________________ To (Date/Time):___________________________
I understand that white lights are not authorized during night driving except in the case of an
emergency. I will follow the posted speed limit of 25 miles per hour and use seat belts when
traveling. Furthermore, I understand that no alcohol of any kind is permitted in the Camp Ripley
Field Training Area. I will call Range Control at 320-616-3137 prior to occupation to coordinate
entrance to the training area. If Range Control is closed, I understand that I am responsible to
sign for a key to the E Gate prior to departing from Range Control. I understand that failure to
comply can result in a loss of privileges to use the facilities at Camp Ripley.
Contact Number: ______________________________________________________________________
Number of guests: _______________
Names of each guest:
Camp Fire (Yes/No): ____________
Signature: ___________________________________________
Printed Name: _______________________________________
Guard Unit: _________________________________________
Date of Request: ____________________
CAMP RIPLEY OPERATIONS OFFICE (OPS PERSONNEL ONLY)
(Circle One)
Approved
/
Disapproved
Signature: ___________________________________________
Printed Name: ________________________________________
Range Control Notes:
8
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
EXPLOSIVE ORDNANCE INCIDENT REPO
9
Appendix 1-Range Operations TO ANNEX A-Operations and Training TO CRTC Regulation 01MAY13
REQUEST FOR UTILIZATION OF CAMP RIPLEY
Original Request
ATS #
Change #______ to ATS #______
Unit:
Unit Address:
Date:
Commercial Phone:
Component:
Point of Contact:
DSN Phone:
UIC
E-Mail Address:
Mission or Training Event:
Billeting Requirements: Troop Issue YES/NO and/or Maid Service Quarters YES/NO
Housing (320)616-3138/3139/3140
EMAIL: Housing Manager: susan.m.ploof.mil@mail.mil/ Assistant Housing Manager heather.r.berens.mil@mail.mil
Units/Organizations requesting Maid Service Quarters will submit a Standard Name Line Roster (SNL) outlining
requirements to Camp Ripley, ATTN: JFMN-CRC-L
Advance Party
Main Body
Preferred Area
Other Buildings
QTY
Date of Arrival:
Date of Arrival:
Maid Service:
Headquarters
Time of Arrival:
Time of Arrival:
Dining Facility
Date of Departure:
Date of Departure:
Maintenance Shelter
# Male Officers:
# Female Officers:
# Male Enlisted:
# Female Enlisted:
Total Number Personnel:
# Male Officers:
# Female Officers:
# Male Enlisted:
# Female Enlisted:
Total Number Personnel:
Medical
Supply
Kitchen (list T-Bldg(s) below)
Troop Issue:
Education Center Resources
TACC Resources
YES/NO (Circle One) (List Date/Time/Duration of Training)
SIZE
QTY
YES/NO (Circle One) (List Date/Time/Duration of Training)
Date(s) Required Start/End Time
Large (41-96)
Medium (21-40)
Small (11-20)
Conference RM (1-10)
LCD Projector
Special Requests
ITEM
QTY
Start/End Time
Small (11-20)
TACC Kitchen
TACC Theater (204)
TACC Gym
TACC Cafeteria (240)
Miscellaneous Buildings/Equipment
ITEM
Copy Machine / Internet Access / IT Requests
See Page 4-5 for Instructions
Date(s) Required
Recreation Center
35MM Projector
PanoBoard
ECF (See Page 2)
Ripley Town Hall
1
QTY
Date(s) Required
Start/End Time
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Confirmations: Post Operations will send out a confirmation for Facilities, Ranges, and Training Areas.
Confirmation of Buses, MILES, Supplies and Services, and Rations will be accomplished by each respective
agency.
RANGES/TRAINING AREAS
Range Control (320)616-3137
SCHEDULING (320)616-2709
NOTE: Schedule Safety Briefing and submit Safety Orders to Range Control Personnel prior to Live Firing.
Schedule Training Area Brief with Training Area Coordinator prior to Training Area usage. For automated
qualification ranges (A-2, A-3, A-4 and CRG) you need to write in the weapon/ammo section: Firing the standard
army qualification scenario, non standard qualification scenario or if the targets are to be left on bob only. If you
are requesting a non standard qualification scenario they need to provide a target matrix for that specific range.
**NOTE: NO ADDITIONS/CHANGES (EXCEPT CANCELLATIONS) TO LIVE FIRE RANGES 24 HOURS PRIOR TO FIRING
DATE
MAY???
TIME
START/END
0800-1700
RANGE/TRAINING
AREA REQUESTED
CRG---AUTO (means you want tower operator)
WEAPON/
AMMO
# PERS
.50cal
??
BIVOUAC
YES
NO
X
EQUIPMENT CLEANING FACILITY: Please fill out ECF Request Form and Submit to
Start date/time:
SFC Martin and SSG Yorek todd.i.martin.mil@mail.mil & nicole.j.yokek.mil@mail.mil
End date/time:
Number and type(s) of weapons:
SIMULATIONS SCHEDULING
MINI-RETS
EST 2000 (Engagement Skills Trainer)
HEAT (HMMWV Egress Assistance Trainer)
MET (MRAP Egress Trainer)
DFIRST - FLEXTRAIN
SMS
ROE (Rule of Engagement)
CFFT (Call for Fire Trainer)
VCOT (Virtual Convoy Operations Trainer)
M-1 SIMNET CCTT
M2A2 Mobile SIMNET CCTT
STS (Sniper Training System)
Circle
One
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
YES/NO
DATE
2
START TIME
END TIME
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
YES/NO
LMTS (Laser Marksmanship Training
System)**
MGTS (Machine Gun Training System)**
YES/NO
YES/NO
LCCATS(Laser Convoy Counter Ambush
Training System)**
VBS2 (Virtual Battlefield System)
YES/NO
YES/NO
** These items are drawn from the MILES Warehouse Bldg 10-65
NOTE: OPERATOR WILL BE PROVIDED FOR FLEXTRAIN, CCTT, HEAT, MET, AND VBS2
FOR SCHEDULING INSTRUCTOR/OPERATION TRAINING CONTACT TADSS FACILITATOR SSG YOREK @320616-3129
IED KIT
AVIATION REQUIREMENTS
N/A
Number and type of aircraft:
Air Operations (320)616-2778
Remarks (to include Aviation POC and Phone #)
SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS (if any) Check all that apply
TOWER
MEDEVAC
CRASH RESCUE
FUEL TRUCK
POL CLASS III---Questions?
Dates Required:
Call the POL Office at (320)616-3001/3002 or E-mail: michael.a.fensk.mil@mail.mil
POL Pt #2 (Area 9)
POL Pt #3 (Area 7)
Bulk Fuel
POL Pt #1 (Mates)
No tracked Vehicles
No tracked Vehicles
JP-8(AVN) JP-8(GRD) MOGAS
SUPPLY & SERVICES DIVISION---Questions? Call SSD at (320)616-3128 or e-mail MSG Flahave
patricia.a.flahave.mil@mail.mil
N/A
QTY
(Listing of Equipment Available @ Logistics http://www.minnesotanationalguard.org/campripley/index.php)
PICK-UP DATE/TIME:
UI
NOMENCLATURE
TURN-IN DATE/TIME:
QTY
UI
Name of individual to sign for equipment:
NOMENCLATURE
Must be on DA Form 1687
3
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
MILES REQUIREMENTS
To request MILES go here: Miles Request Memorandum
Contact for MILES Phone: (320)616-3170 DSN: 871-3170 E-Mail: nicole.j.yorek.mil@mail.mil
AMMO/CLASS V
PHONE: (320)632-7338 DSN: 871-7338
E-MAIL: derek.j.lindberg.mil@mail.mil or daniel.j.miner.mil@mail.mil
Will Ammunition items (Class V) be required while at Camp Ripley?
If yes, have forecasts and DA 581’s been forwarded thru command channels?
(Must coordinate with ASP NLT Thirty (30) days prior to training dates.)
YES
YES
Circle One
NO
NO
MORALE WELFARE RECREATION (MWR) DIVIDEND CHECK
Units in Annual Training (AT) status are authorized MWR dividend. To request MWR you need to fill out an ATS Form 39
(Strength Report/Request for Morale Support Fund Dividends) and turn it into NGMN-CRB
PHONE: (320)616-3171 DSN: 871-3171
E-MAIL: heike.m.lewandowski.mil@mail.mil
PHONE: (320)632-7431 DSN: 871-7431
Link to Contract Dining Facility Request
CONTRACT DINING FACILITY
E-Mail: christopher.a.degeest.mil@mail.mil
INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (IT) REQUIREMENTS
(INTERNET ACCESS / LONG DISTANCE CALLING / COPY MACHINES)
Internet Access for Non-Minnesota National Guard Organizations:
1). Verify your reserved building/room is internet capable – Internet Capable Buildings
You may need to schedule a different building to accommodate your unit/agencies needs.
2.) Contact the Camp Ripley IMO - CW2 Bjerke at (320) 616-2702 no less than 15 days prior to arrival date at Camp
Ripley.
Failure to contact the Camp Ripley IMO at least 15 days in advance of arrival at Camp Ripley
will result in denial of internet access.
Copy Machine requirements for Non-Minnesota National Guard Organizations:
Please contact SGM Vance England @ (651) 268-8885 for assistance in procuring a copy machine from a local
vendor.
Phone/Long Distance Calling capabilities for Non-Minnesota National Guard Organizations:
Local, DSN, and on-post calling capabilities are available in troop issue buildings. Please bring calling cards if
you need to make long distance calls.
VTC/DLN Sites and Computer Lab requirements for Non-Minnesota National Guard:
Contact the Camp Ripley IMO at (320) 616-2702
**Information Technology requirements for MN National Guard Organizations**
MN ARNG units must request copy machines and/or all IT requirements (i.e. Network Connectivity in buildings)
through their organizations IMO as a J6 Work Order. Please be aware that Camp Ripley has a limited number of
buildings that are internet capable. You may need to schedule a different building to accommodate your units
needs. You will need to provide your IMO with:
1.) Building numbers where copy machine and/or IT requirements are required
2.) Dates of training
3.) Number of computer systems, printers and copy machines required
4.) POC’s
5.)
VTC/DLN Sites and Computer Lab requirements for Minnesota National Guard Organizations:
Please click here to schedule a VTC/DLN site or reserve a Computer Lab
4
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
RADIO FREQUENCIES
th
MNARNG units get frequency assignment through channels for 34 ID.
Non-MNARNG units that require radio frequencies of any type for use while training at Camp Ripley need to
contact: SFC Patrick Painschab, (651)282-4197 or E-MAIL: Patrick.Painschab@us.army.mil
BUSES
Call Traffic Manager (320)616-2680/2681
www.dma.state.mn.us In the drop down menu go to Internal Use Only; JFHQ-MN; J-Staff; J4 Logistics; Transportation;
Bus Request Form
Note: Convoy Requests (DD Form 1265) must still be submitted to MNAG-LOG-T 90 days prior to movement
5
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB K
Range Control TABLES
RC Table 1-1 OIC/RSO Requirements
RC Table Declinations
RC Table Medical Requirements
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
Range Control Table 1-1
Officer-in-charge and range safety officer requirements
Weapon System
1
1
OFF
OIC
WO
NCO
X
X
X
Practice hand grenades; sub-caliber devices;
laser devices; firing devices; simulators and trip
flares; small arms and machine guns; and over8
water/ice crossing operations
2
Chemical agents and smoke
Aerial gunnery & air defense weapons; live
grenades, grenade launchers, and grenade
machine guns; live mines & demolitions; tanks
and fighting vehicle cannons
3
Field Artillery
Mortars
Air defense artillery rockets and guided missiles
Direct fire anti-tank rockets and missiles
Live-fire exercises using organic weapons,
squad through company, battery, troop
CALFEX/CAX using outside fire support, battery,
squad, platoon, company; or battalion and
6
larger
Rappel Tower (see NOTE below)
8
Sniper Known Distance
8
Sniper Fire and Maneuver
8
Reflexive Fire
OFF
RSO
WO
NCO
E-6
X
X
E-5
X
E-6
X
X
E-5
X
X
E-7
X
X
E-6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E-7
E-6
X
X
5
X
X
E-6
4
E-6
E-7
X
X
X
X
X
X
E-7
X
X
E-7
X
X
E-7
X
X
E-6
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E-7
E-6
E-7
E-7
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
E-5
E-5
E-6
E-6
E-6
ROTC Cadets, OCS students, and WOCs are not authorized to perform the duties of OIC and RSO on any
live-fire ranges. Officers and WOs that have not completed OBC/WOBC are not authorized to be OICs or
RSOs on any live-fire ranges.
Rappel Tower OIC/RSO requirements, per TC 21-24, dated 09 JAN 2008:
a. Ground and Wall-side Tower Rappelling: A fully qualified Rappel Safety Officer (RSO) (E-7 or above) may act as
the Rappel Master and range OIC. The Rappel Lane NCO (E-5 or above) will be the range RSO.
b. Helicopter Skid Rappelling: A Fully Qualified Rappel Safety Officer (E7 or above) will be the range OIC. A Fully
Qualified Rappel Master will be the range RSO. The OIC cannot be the RSO as well.
Notes:
Civilians in the grade of GS-07 and above, or equivalent, may act as OIC; GS-05 and above, or equivalent, may
act as RSO.
2 For the Marine Corps, OIC and RSO must be E-4 and above and be chemical, biological, radiological, and
nuclear (CBRN) MOS 5702/5711 when conducting CBRN or smoke training. For the Army, OIC and RSO must be
CBRN qualified when conducting CBRN and smoke training.
3 Use of E-7s as OICs is authorized only when approved by the senior commander (Army)/installation commander
(Marine Corps). Either the battery executive officer or the platoon leader normally performs duties of the RSO.
4 RSO for the Marine Corps can be E-5 for mortar training activities.
5 SRO will be a CW3, CW03, or higher or civilian in the grade of GS-11 or above
6 For battalion or larger CALFEX/CAX, OIC will be a filed grade officer; exercise RSO will be E-7 or above
7 ROTC Cadets, OCS students, and WOCs are not authorized to perform the duties of OIC and RSO on any livefire ranges. Officers and WOs that have not completed OBC/WOBC are not authorized to be OICs or RSOs on any
live-fire ranges.
8 CRTC specific requirements for Sniper, Reflexive Fire, and water/ice training events
2
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
DECLINATION STATIONS ON CAMP RIPLEY
Range Control Table DECLINATIONs
All aiming circles must be declinated prior to use when laying indirect fire weapon systems. The following
declination stations are located at:
a. STATION 1
b. STATION 2
UM 95780531
UM 88022470
c. STATION 3
d. STATION 4
UM 88441104
UM 90991474
Located in Cantonment Area 8, in front of the TMC
Located in Training Area 68, SE of the intersection of Kodiak road and
Easy street
Located in Training 18, west of Manilla Road
Located on the east side of Firing Point 2 on J Range
3
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
MEDICAL SUPPORT REQUIREMENTS
Range Control Table MEDICAL REQUIREMENTS
Weapon system/Operational activity
Practice hand grenades; sub-caliber devices; laser devices;
firing devices; simulators and trip flares; small arms and
machine guns; and over-water/ice crossing operations
1
Non-Live Fire Ranges and Training Areas
Driving Training Courses
Chemical agents and smoke
Live Fire Shoot House
Aerial gunnery & air defense weapons; live grenades,
grenade launchers, and grenade machine guns; live mines &
demolitions; tanks and fighting vehicle cannons
Airborne Operations for Personnel Drops ONLY
Field Artillery
Mortars
Air defense artillery rockets and guided missiles
Direct fire anti-tank rockets and missiles
Live-fire exercises using organic weapons, squad through
company, battery, troop
CALFEX/CAX using outside fire support, battery, squad,
6
platoon, company; or battalion and larger
Rappel Tower
Sniper Known Distance
Sniper Fire and Maneuver
Reflexive Fire
st
CLS/1
responder
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
1 Except for Rappel Tower which requires a Medic/EMT with backboard and C Collar
4
Certified Medic/EMT
X
X
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB L
Suspense Dates
5
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
SUSPENSE DATES
SUSPENSE
DESCRIPTION
90 DAYS
An Initial SIGNED copy of an CRM/ORM MUST be submitted to
Range Control NLT 90 days prior to the training event (i.e. live-fire,
simunitions training, rappelling, water operations, and aerial
operations).
REQUEST USE OF RANGES AND TRAINING AREAS
For ALL Un-Established ranges, DEMO ranges, and/or Live-Fire
Exercises: OPLANS; DEMO Plans with Wiring Diagrams; Target
Scenarios; Target Matrices; Composite Risk Management
Worksheet (DA Form 7566)s must be submitted to Range Control
NLT 90 days prior to range usage.
COORDINATE USE OF HE HAND GRENADES
NLT 90 days prior, units must schedule the Training Area that their
stationary Firing Point(s) [FP(s)] and/or Hip-Shoot missions will be
located in, and the Impact Area they will be firing into. This will give
Range Control the time to draw, verify, and approve the Surface
Danger Zones (SDZs) for the requested Firing Points (FPs).
Information necessary for Range Control to produce SDZ’s for Mortar
units – TFT’s for your weapon system, Mortar size and Ammo to be
fired from the firing point.
Units will submit a Hip-Shoot Mission OPLAN and Risk Management
Worksheet NLT 90 days prior to Range Control for review and
approval.
The LRAD must be approved through Range Control
Unit requests the CLFX NLT 90 days prior to range usage, utilizing
ATS Form 23
Request Breach Facility Doors and Windows with
30 DAYS
30 DAYS
Coordinate use of RIOT Control Agents with Range Control
Coordinate Aerial Disbursement of Chemical Agents with RC
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
90 DAYS
72 HOURS
72 HOURS
72 HOURS
72 HOURS
72 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
48 HOURS
REQUEST RANGE CHANGES/ADDITIONS WITH RANGE
CONTROL (NEED TO SUBMIT EXCEPTION TO POLICY MEMO IF
CHANGES ARE NEEDED WITHIN 72 HOURS)
REQUEST WEAPON SYSTEM CHANGES/ADDITIONS WITH
RANGE CONTROL (NEED TO SUBMIT EXCEPTION TO POLICY
MEMO IF CHANGES ARE NEEDED WITHIN 72 HOURS)
Military units are required to utilize SINCGARS as their Primary form
of communication. An Exception to Policy Request must be
submitted by the Unit Commander to Range Control NLT 72 hours
prior to range/training area usage. All means of acquiring
SINCGARS capability must be attempted prior to authorizing the use
of Motorola radios.
REQUEST CHANGES TO AUTOMATED RANGE SCENARIOS
WITH AUTOMATED TARGET SYSTEMS
CONDUCT WALK THRU OF CALFEX OR NON-STANDARD LIVEFIRE EXERCISES WITH RANGE CONTROL
Coordinate Convoy Movements and Road Marches
SUBMIT POV EXCEPTION TO POLICY REQUEST
SUBMIT WHITE LIGHT EXCEPTION TO POLICY REQUEST
COORDINATE NVD DRIVERS TRAINING
COORDINATE BLOCKING OF ROADS AND TRAILS
REQUEST SMOKE GENERATOR AND SMOKE POT USE
6
PAGE
REFERENCE
1.4.4
1.7.1
1.7.3
5.2.1
9.1.2
9.3.1
14.2.7,g)
17.12.3
15.11.7
13.2.1
13.5
1.7.4
1.7.4
1.15.3
4.7.1,b)
17.8.3
1.14.2,a),4)
1.9.3
1.10.2
1.10.3
1.13.4
13.4.1
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TAB M
Range Control Equipment Support
7
2013 CRTC Range Regulation 19 July 2013
TARGETRY
Units shall contact Range Control in advance to request targets. This may be done via
email or phone call. Go to this link to fill out the request or to review what targets are on
hand at RC: http://ngmnsp2010/CRTC/OPS/Range/default.aspx
Units who fail to request in advance may be required to wait for RC availability to pull
targets.
For any targets that are not listed, please send a NSN, and RC will do it’s best to get the
targets.
EQUIPMENT AVAILABLE FOR USE
a. Staplers
b. Staples
c. Range Flag (for use for Live Fire and Simunitions)
d. Motorola’s (Exception to Policy is required for Military units to utilize
e. M9 Magazines
d. M16/M4 Magazines
NOTE: Magazines are issued out from RC, they are not on the range.
f. Bullhorns
g. Concertina Wire
h. Pickets
i. Sandbags
NOTE: You may be required to fill sandbags yourself
j. Backboard and C-Collars
k. FM’s and TM’s (We only have certain weapons systems to issue out)
l. Safety Paddles
Some equipment you will sign for with at RC or Opening of the Range. Make sure you
verify that all the equipment is present at the range annotated on the range hand
receipt. (some of the items that may be at the range, tables, chairs, fire extinguishers,
etc.)
8